advertisement
SCALANCE X-300
SIMATIC NET
Industrial Ethernet Switches
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions
05/2016
A5E01113043-20
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Division Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
A5E01113043-20
Ⓟ 05/2016 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2010 - 2016.
All rights reserved
Preface
Purpose of the Operating Instructions
These Operating Instructions describe the design and functions of the compact and modular
Industrial Ethernet Switches of the SCALANCE X-300 product line and support you during installation, commissioning, and troubleshooting on site.
Validity of the Operating Instructions
These Operating Instructions are valid for the following product groups of the SCALANCE X-
300 product line, see also section Product overview (Page 27).
● X-300
● X-300M
● XR-300M
● X-300EEC
● XR-300M EEC
● X-300M PoE
● XR-300M PoE
● MM900 media modules
● SFP transceiver
Names of the devices in these operating instructions
Classification
Product line (X-300)
Product group
Device
Variant
Within the SCALANCE X-300 product line, there are product groups, devices and variants.
Description
For all devices and variants of all product groups within the SCALANCE X-300 product line, the term "IE Switch X-300" is used.
For all devices and variants of a product group, only the product group is used.
For a device, only the device name is used.
A variant of a device represents a particular design version. They are identified by a separate order number.
When all variants of a device are meant in the text, "(all)" is often added after the device name.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
3
4
Preface
Overview of the technical documentation of the IE Switches X-300
The technical documentation of the X-300 product line is divided into hardware and software and can be found in the following documents:
● PH - Configuration Manual (PDF)
The software is described in the configuration manual (PH) for both product lines X-300 and X-400.
● BAK - Operating Instructions (compact) on paper
The hardware of each product group is described in the Operating Instructions (compact)
(BAK).
● BA - Operating Instructions (PDF)
The hardware for all product groups and general information can be found in the
Operating Instructions (BA).
Contents
Software description
Hardware description
Product group
All devices of the X-300 and X-400 product lines
All devices of the X-300 product line
X-300
X-300M
XR-300M
X-300EEC
XR-300M EEC
X-300M PoE
XR-300M PoE
MM900 (media modules)
SFP (transceivers)
Type of document Document identification number
PH X300/X400 C79000-G89000-C187
BA X-300
BAK X-300
A5E01113043
A5E00982643A
BAK X-300M
BAK XR-300M
BAK X-300 EEC
A5E02630801A
A5E02661171A
A5E02661176A
BAK XR-300M EEC A5E02630809A
BAK X-300M PoE A5E02630810A
BAK XR-300M PoE A5E02661178A
BAK MM900
BAK SFP
Notices leaflet
A5E02630805A
A5E02630804A
A5E02648904A
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Preface
Further documentation
For help on configuration and diagnostics using Web-based management, the CLI command line interface, or SNMP, refer to the following documentation:
● Configuration Manual SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400
This configuration manual is available on the following media:
– On the supplied CD
– In 5 languages on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
19625108 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19625108 )
● SIMATIC NET - Industrial Ethernet Network manual
This manual is available on the following media:
– On paper under order numbers:
- English version: 6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA1
- German version: 6GK1 970-1BA10-0AA0
– In German and English on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Automation Customer
Support under the following entry ID:
27069465 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )
If you have questions on the use of SIMATIC NET products, please contact your Siemens sales partner.
Standards and approvals
The devices of the SCALANCE X-300 product line meet the requirements for the CE mark.
For more detailed information, refer to section Approvals, certificates, standards (Page 223).
Integration in STEP 7 projects
The current GSDML file must be used for integration in STEP 7 V5.4 SP5 projects. This applies to all products covered by these operating instructions.
You can obtain the relevant GSD file from the Internet at:
46183514 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/46183514 )
You will find the file for the firmware update V3.3.1 for X-300 under entry ID "46183538".
SIMATIC NET glossary
Explanations of many of the specialist terms used in this documentation can be found in the
SIMATIC NET glossary.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
5
Preface
You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary here:
● SIMATIC NET Manual Collection or product DVD
The DVD ships with certain SIMATIC NET products.
● On the Internet under the following address:
50305045 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50305045 )
Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, equipment and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates.
For the secure operation of Siemens products and solutions, it is necessary to take suitable preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and integrate each component into a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Third-party products that may be in use should also be considered. For more information about industrial security, visit http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
To stay informed about product updates as they occur, sign up for a product-specific newsletter. For more information, visit http://support.automation.siemens.com.
6
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Table of contents
1
2
3
4
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
4.2.1.2
4.2.1.3
4.2.1.4
4.2.1.5
4.2.1.6
4.2.1.7
4.2.1.8
4.2.1.9
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
7
Table of contents
8
4.2.8.3
4.2.8.4
4.2.8.5
4.2.8.6
4.2.8.7
4.2.8.8
4.2.8.9
4.2.8.10
4.2.8.11
4.2.8.12
4.2.8.13
4.2.8.14
4.2.8.15
4.2.8.16
4.2.8.17
4.2.8.18
4.2.1.10
4.2.1.11
4.2.1.12
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.4.1
4.2.5
4.2.5.1
4.2.6
4.2.6.1
4.2.7
4.2.7.1
4.2.8
4.2.8.1
4.2.8.2
4.2.9
4.2.9.1
4.2.9.2
4.2.9.3
4.2.9.4
4.2.9.5
4.2.9.6
4.2.9.7
4.2.9.8
4.2.9.9
4.2.9.10
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.1.1
4.3.1.2
4.3.1.3
4.3.1.4
4.3.1.5
4.3.1.6
4.3.2
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Table of contents
5
6
4.3.2.1
4.3.2.2
4.3.3
4.4
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.8
4.5.9
5.1
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.1.1
6.5.1.2
6.5.1.3
6.5.1.4
6.5.1.5
6.5.1.6
6.5.1.7
6.5.1.8
6.5.1.9
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9
Table of contents
7
8
6.5.2.2
6.5.2.3
6.5.2.4
6.5.2.5
6.5.2.6
6.5.2.7
6.5.2.8
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
Connecting the power supply 100 to 240 VAC to X-300EEC / XR-300M EEC ................... 142
Connecting the 100 to 240 V AC power supply with the XR-300M PoE ............................. 144
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
8.1
8.4
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.5
8.5.1
8.5.2
8.5.3
8.5.4
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
10
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Table of contents
9
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.2.6
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
8.7
8.7.1
8.7.2
8.7.3
8.7.4
8.8
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
8.8.4
8.8.5
8.9
8.9.1
8.9.2
8.9.3
8.9.4
8.10
8.10.1
8.10.2
8.10.3
8.10.4
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
11
Table of contents
9.7
9.7.1
9.7.2
9.7.3
9.7.4
9.8
9.8.1
9.8.1.1
9.8.2
9.8.3
9.8.4
9.5
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.6
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.9
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
9.9.5
9.9.6
10
10.1
11
11.1
11.2
11.3
A
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
A.1
A.2
The connector system M12/X coded according to IEC 61076-2-109 .................................. 313
12
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Table of contents
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
EMC-compatible installation of electrical Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS cabling ........... 317
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
13
Table of contents
14
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Safety instructions
1
1.1 Important notes on using the device
Safety notices on the use of the device
The following safety notices must be adhered to when setting up and operating the device and during all associated work such as installation, connecting up, replacing or opening the device.
General information
WARNING
Opening the device
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED.
WARNING
Safety extra low voltage (only devices with 24 VDC power supply)
The equipment is designed for operation with Safety Extra-Low Voltage (SELV) by a
Limited Power Source (LPS).
This means that only SELV / LPS (Limited Power Source) complying with IEC 60950-1 / EN
60950-1 / VDE 0805-1 must be connected to the power supply terminals. The power supply unit for the equipment power supply must comply with NEC Class 2, as described by the
National Electrical Code (r) (ANSI / NFPA 70).
If the equipment is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies), both must meet these requirements.
A power source that supplies safety extra low voltage combined with a following NEC Class
2 power limiter also meets the requirements according to IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 / VDE
0805-1 or NEC Class 2. A suitable power limiter is for example the redundancy module
SITOP PSE202U NEC Class 2 (article number 6EP1962-2BA00).
WARNING
For use in an environment with pollution level 2
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
15
Safety instructions
1.1 Important notes on using the device
WARNING
Safety notice for connectors with LAN (Local Area Network) marking
A LAN or LAN segment, with all its associated interconnected equipment, shall be entirely contained within a single low-voltage power distribution and within a single building. The
LAN is considered to be in an "environment A" according to IEEE802.3 or "environment 0" according to IEC TR 62102, respectively. Never connect directly to TNV-circuits (Telephone
Network) or WAN (Wide Area Network).
General notices about use in hazardous areas
WARNING
Risk of explosion when connecting or disconnecting the device
EXPLOSION HAZARD
DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT WHEN A FLAMMABLE OR
COMBUSTIBLE ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT.
WARNING
Replacing components
EXPLOSION HAZARD
SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION
2 OR ZONE 2.
WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
When used in hazardous environments corresponding to Class I, Division 2 or Class I,
Zone 2, the device must be installed in a cabinet or a suitable enclosure.
WARNING
Opening the device
DO NOT OPEN WHEN ENERGIZED.
16
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Safety instructions
1.2 PELV
Safety notices on use in hazardous areas according to ATEX and IECEx
WARNING
Requirements for the cabinet/enclosure
To comply with EC Directive 94/9 (ATEX95) or the conditions of IECEx, this enclosure must meet the requirements of at least IP54 in compliance with EN 60529.
The fiber-optic bus connections labeled SCALANCE MM900 (see type plate) may also be led through a hazardous area zone1 (see also Auto-Hotspot, section "Explosion Protection
Directive (ATEX)").
WARNING
Suitable cables for temperatures in excess of 70 °C
If the cable or conduit entry point exceeds 70°C or the branching point of conductors exceeds 80°C, special precautions must be taken.
If the equipment is operated in an air ambient in excess of 50 °C, only use cables with admitted maximum operating temperature of at least 80 °C.
WARNING
Protection against transient voltage surges
Provisions shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient voltage surges of more than 40%. This criterion is fulfilled, if supplies are derived from
SELV (Safety Extra-Low Voltage) only.
1.2 PELV
Note
Safety extra-low voltage
The supply of the devices by PELV (Protective Extra Low Voltage) according to DIN VDE
0100-410 or IEC 60364-4-41 is permitted when the generated nominal voltage does not exceed the voltage limits 25 VAC or 60 VDC.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
17
Safety instructions
1.3 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas
1.3 Important notes on using the device in hazardous areas
WARNING
WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD -
DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS AREA IS KNOWN TO BE
NON-HAZARDOUS.
WARNING
Restricted area of application
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C and D or nonhazardous locations only.
WARNING
Restricted area of application
This equipment is suitable for use in Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC or non-hazardous locations only.
Note on devices with power supply 100 to 240 V AC
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
The supply voltage for the devices listed is 100 to 240 VAC.
This device can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist.
Connect or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off.
WARNING
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply do not have an ATEX or IECEx approval.
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply are not approved for use in hazardous areas according to EC-RL-94/9 ATEX or IECEx.
NOTICE
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where necessary, with cable ties.
18
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
Safety requirements for installation
According to the IEC 61131-2 standard and therefore in accordance with the EU directive
2006/95/EC (Low Voltage Directive), the devices are "open equipment" and in accordance with UL/CSA certification, they are an "open type".
To fulfill requirements for safe operation with regard to mechanical stability, flame retardation, stability, and shock-hazard protection, the following alternative types of installation are specified:
● Installation in a suitable cabinet.
● Installation in a suitable enclosure.
● Installation in a suitably equipped, enclosed control room.
1.4 Security recommendations
To prevent unauthorized access, note the following security recommendations.
General
● You should make regular checks to make sure that the device meets these recommendations and/or other security guidelines.
● Evaluate your plant as a whole in terms of security. Use a cell protection concept with suitable products.
● When confidential zones are used, the internal and external network are disconnected, an attacker cannot access the data from the outside.
● Operate the device only within a protected network area.
● Use VPN to encrypt and authenticate communication from and to the devices.
● For data transmission via a non-secure network use an encrypted VPN tunnel (IPsec).
● For operation of the device in a non-secure infrastructure no product liability will be accepted.
● Separate connections correctly (WBM. Telnet, SSH etc.).
Physical access
● Limit physical access to the device to qualified personnel.
The memory card or the C-PLUG contains sensitive data such as certificates, keys etc. that can be read out and modified.
● Lock unused physical ports on the device. Unused ports can be used to gain forbidden access to the plant.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
19
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
Software (security functions)
● Keep the software up to date. Check regularly for security updates of the product.
You will find information on this on the Internet pages "Industrial Security"
● Inform yourself regularly about security advisories and bulletins published by Siemens productCERT.
● Only activate protocols that you really require to use the device.
● Restrict access to the device with a firewall or rules in an access control list (ACL -
Access Control List).
● Restrict access to the management of the device with rules in an access control list
(ACL).
● The option of VLAN structuring provides good protection against DoS attacks and unauthorized access. Check whether this is practical or useful in your environment.
● Enable logging functions. Use the central logging function to log changes and access attempts centrally. Check the logging information regularly.
● Configure a Syslog server to forward all logs to a central location.
See also
www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity ( http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity )
Passwords
● Define rules for the use of devices and assignment of passwords.
● Regularly update passwords and keys to increase security.
● Change all default passwords for users before you operate the device.
● Only use passwords with a high password strength. Avoid weak passwords for example password1, 123456789, abcdefgh.
● Make sure that all passwords are protected and inaccessible to unauthorized personnel.
● Do not use the same password for different users and systems or after it has expired.
Keys and certificates
This section deals with the security keys and certificates you require to set up SSL.
● We strongly recommend that you create your own SSL certificates and make them available.
There are preset certificates and keys on the device. The preset and automatically created SSL certificates are self-signed. We recommend that you use SSL certificates signed either by a reliable external or by an internal certification authority.
The device has an interface via which you can import the certificates and keys.
● Use the certification authority including key revocation and management to sign the certificates.
20
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
● Handle user-defined private keys with great caution if you use user-defined SSH or SSL keys.
● Verify certificates and fingerprints on the server and client to avoid "man in the middle" attacks.
● We recommend that you use certificates with a key length of 2048 bits.
● Change keys and certificates immediately, if there is a suspicion of compromise.
Secure/non-secure protocols
● Avoid or disable non-secure protocols, for example Telnet and TFTP. For historical reasons, these protocols are still available, however not intended for secure applications.
Use non-secure protocols on the device with caution.
● Avoid or disable non-secure protocols. Check whether use of the following protocols is necessary:
– PNIO
– Broadcast pings
– Non authenticated and unencrypted interfaces
– ICMP (redirect)
– MRP, HRP
– GMRP and IGMP
– LLDP
– Syslog
– RADIUS
– DHCP Options 66/67
– TFTP
– GMRP and GVRP
– Multicast routing
● The following protocols provide secure alternatives:
– SNMPv1/v2 → SNMPv3
Check whether use of SNMPv1 is necessary. SNMPv1 is classified as non-secure.
Use the option of preventing write access. The product provides you with suitable setting options.
If SNMP is enabled, change the community names. If no unrestricted access is necessary, restrict access with SNMP.
Use SNMPv3 in conjunction with passwords.
– HTTP → HTTPS
– TFTP → FTPS
– Telnet → SSH
– SNTP → NTP
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
21
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
● Use secure protocols when access to the device is not prevented by physical protection measures.
● To prevent unauthorized access to the device or network, take suitable protective measures against non-secure protocols.
● If you require non-secure protocols and services, operate the device only within a protected network area.
● Restrict the services and protocols available to the outside to a minimum.
● For the DCP function, enable the "DCP read-only" mode after commissioning.
Available protocols per port
The following list provides you with an overview of the open ports on this device. Keep this in mind when configuring a firewall.
The table includes the following columns:
● Protocol
All protocols that the device supports
● Port number
Port number assigned to the protocol
● Port status
– Open
The port is always open and cannot be closed.
– Open (when configured)
The port is open if it has been configured.
Note
With some protocols the port may be open although the corresponding protocol is disabled, for example TFTP.
● Default status of the port
– Open
As default the port is open.
– Closed
As default the port is closed.
● Authentication
Specifies whether or not the protocol is authenticated during access.
22
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
Protocol
SSH
HTTP
HTTPS
SNTP
NTP (secure)
SNMP
PROFINET IO
PROFINET IO
Service
Port number
TCP/22
TCP/80
TCP/443
UDP/123
UDP/161
UDP/34964
UDP/1026, 1027
TCP/84
Port status
Open
Open
(when configured)
Open
Open
(when configured)
Open
(when configured)
Open
Open
Default status of the port
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Authentication
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
23
Safety instructions
1.4 Security recommendations
24
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Introduction
2
2.1 Basics of Ethernet switching
Ethernet switching
Ethernet switches forward data packets directly from the input port to the appropriate output port during data exchange based on the address information. Ethernet switches operate on a direct delivery basis.
Essentially, switches have the following functions:
● Connecting collision domains / subnets
Since repeaters and star couplers (hubs) operate at the physical level, their use is restricted to the span of a collision domain. Switches connect collision domains. Their use is therefore not restricted to the maximum span of a repeater network. On the contrary, extremely large networks with very large spans are possible with switches. The distances achieved depend on the fiber-optic interfaces used in the devices and the FO fibers used
(see technical specifications).
● Load containment
By filtering the data traffic based on the Ethernet (MAC) addresses, local data traffic remains local. In contrast to repeaters or hubs, which distribute data unfiltered to all ports
/ network nodes, switches operate selectively. Only data intended for nodes in other subnets is switched from the input port to the appropriate output port of the switch. To make this possible, a table assigning Ethernet (MAC) addresses to output ports is created by the switch in a "teach-in" mode.
● Limiting the propagation of errors to the subnet involved.
By checking the validity of a data packet on the basis of the checksum which each data packet contains, the switch ensures that bad data packets are not transported further.
Collisions in one network segment are not passed on to other segments.
The need for Industrial Ethernet switches
With over 95% of LANs based on Ethernet, this is the most commonly used technology. The use of switches is particularly important: They allow extensive networks with large numbers of nodes to be set up, increase the data throughput, and simplify network expansion.
The IE Switches X-300 from SIMATIC NET are designed for use in high-speed plant networks that will also meet future requirements. With the HRP redundancy function and standby linking of rings, high network availability can be achieved. HRP and standby link reconfigures the network within 300 ms. Support of IT standards such as VLAN, RSTP,
IGMP, and GARP makes seamless integration of automation networks in existing office networks possible.
The IE Switches X-300 are designed for use in switching cubicles and cabinets.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
25
Introduction
2.1 Basics of Ethernet switching
Technical options (network topologies)
The IE Switches X-300 simplify the expansion of a network regardless of the network topology.
You can use an IE Switch X-300 in the following network topologies:
● Linear structure
● Star/tree structure
● Ring with redundancy manager
The maximum cable length is 70 km for single mode gigabit transmission. A mixed topology consisting of IE Switch X-300 devices and OSMs/ESMs is possible at the electrical ports. A mixed topology consisting of IE Switch X-300 devices and an OSM via the optical ports is not possible.
Using an IE Switch X-300 as the redundancy manager in a ring with redundancy manager provides greater availability. If there is an interruption on the connection between these switches, the IE Switch X-300 used as redundancy manager acts like a switch and in a very short time creates a line from the ring. As a result, a functional, end-to-end structure is restored. For information on this topic, refer to the Configuration Manual "SIMATIC NET -
Industrial Ethernet Switches SCALANCE X-300 SCALANCE X-400."
26
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
2.2 Product overview
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
2.2.1 Type designations
Structure of the type designation
The type designation of an IE Switch X-300 is made up of several parts that have the following meaning:
Interfaces of devices without optical ports:
Interface
FE
[-]
Property
Electrical RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps.
Electrical RJ-45 port for 10/100 Mbps or 10/100/1000 Mbps.
Interfaces of devices with optical ports:
Interface
FE
LD FE
[-]
LD
LH
LH+
Property
SC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 5 km).
SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 26 km).
SC port 1000 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 750 m).
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 10 km).
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 40 km).
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km).
If information applies to all devices, the term "IE Switches X-300" is used. If information applies to only a particular product group, the relevant names will be used without extra
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
27
Introduction
2.2 Product overview information on the type or number of interfaces. Examples: "X-300" stands for non-modular devices with a compact housing, "XR-300" means all rack devices, "X-300M" means all modular devices etc.
Note
SCALANCE X320-3LD FE
The SCALANCE X320-3LD FE deviates from the type designation in that it has an SC port for multimode fiber-optic cable up to a maximum of 5 km in length and two SC ports for single mode fiber-optic cable up to a maximum of 26 km in length.
• Port 21: Multimode
•
Port 22: LD (long distance, single mode)
• Port 23: LD (long distance, single mode)
2.2.2 Designs of the IE Switch X-300 devices
Designs and variants of the IE Switch X-300
The IE switches of the SCALANCE X-300 product line can have the following designs and variants:
Designs of the IE Switch X300
X Compact devices: IE switches X-300 (3 sizes: 60, 120, 180)
XR Rack devices (R): 19" IE switches (for 19" cabinet installation)
X-300EEC IE Switches X-300: 19"/2 devices (width: 216 mm)
Table 2- 1
Variant M of the IE Switch X-300
M Modular devices (M) are intended to accommodate media modules.
• Partially modular devices: Some of the ports (slots) are intended to accommodate media modules.
Example: X308-2M
•
Fully modular devices: All ports (slots) are intended to accommodate media modules.
Example: XR324-12M
28
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Image 2-1 Designs of the X-300 IE switches, example of plugging media modules into the media module slots of the XR324-12M
2.2.3
Device
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X-300 product group
Properties
4 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m
6 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
1 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 26 km
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
3 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
3 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 10 km
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m
Order number
6GK5 304-2BD00-2AA3
6GK5 306-1BF00-2AA3
6GK5 307-3BL00-2AA3
6GK5 307-3BL10-2AA3
6GK5 307-3BM00-2AA3
6GK5 307-3BM10-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FL00-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FL10-2AA3
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
29
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Device
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1FE
X320-3LD FE
Properties
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 10 km
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 40 km
1 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 70 km
3 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
7 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
10 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
Order number
6GK5 308-2FM00-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FM10-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FN00-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FN10-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FP00-2AA3
6GK5 308-2FP10-2AA3
20 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
1 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 5 km
20 x 10/100 Mbps RJ-45 ports electrical
1 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 26 km
6GK5 310-0FA00-2AA3
6GK5 310-0FA10-2AA3
6GK5 310-0BA00-2AA3
6GK5 310-0BA10-2AA3
6GK5 320-1BD00-2AA3
6GK5 320-3BF00-2AA3
2.2.4
Device
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
Product group X-300M
Properties
1 x 24 VDC
4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 100/1000 Mbps for 2-port media modules
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
1 x 12 VDC, module varnished
4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 100/1000 Mbps for 2-port media modules
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
Order number
6GK5 308-2GG00-2AA2
6GK5 308-2GG00-2CA2
30
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
2.2.5
Device
XR324-12M
XR324-12M
XR324-12M
XR324-12M
XR324-12M TS
Product group XR-300M
Properties
2 x 24 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
2 x 24 VDC
LEDs and diagnostics port on front connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
LEDs and diagnostics port on front connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
2 x 24 VDC, modules varnished
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
Order number
6GK5 324-0GG00-1AR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-3AR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-1HR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-3HR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-1CR2
2.2.6 X-300EEC product group
Product / ports
X302-7EEC
•
2 electrical ports
• 7 optical ports
X307-2EEC
• 7 electrical ports
•
2 optical ports
Properties
1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
Printed board varnished
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Printed board varnished
1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
1 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
2 x power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
Printed board varnished
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Order number
6GK5302-7GD00-1EA3
6GK5302-7GD00-1GA3
6GK5302-7GD00-2EA3
6GK5302-7GD00-2GA3
6GK5302-7GD00-3EA3
6GK5302-7GD00-3GA3
6GK5302-7GD00-4EA3
6GK5302-7GD00-4GA3
6GK5307-2FD00-1EA3
6GK5307-2FD00-1GA3
6GK5307-2FD00-2EA3
6GK5307-2FD00-2GA3
31
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Product / ports
* See naming key below
Properties
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Printed board varnished
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Printed board varnished
Order number
6GK5307-2FD00-3EA3
6GK5307-2FD00-3GA3
6GK5307-2FD00-4EA3
6GK5307-2FD00-4GA3
2.2.7
Device
XR324-4M EEC
XR-300M EEC product group
Properties
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
LEDs, connector data cable outlet on front
Connector power supply and diagnostics port at rear
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
LEDs, connector data cable outlet on front
Connector power supply and diagnostics port at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
LEDs, connector data cable outlet on front
Connector power supply and diagnostics port at rear
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
LEDs, connector data cable outlet on front
Connector power supply and diagnostics port at rear
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply on front
Data cable outlet and diagnostics port at rear
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply on front
Data cable outlet and diagnostics port at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply on front
Data cable outlet and diagnostics port at rear
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply on front
Data cable outlet and diagnostics port at rear
Order number
6GK5 324-4GG00-1ER2
6GK5 324-4GG00-2ER2
6GK5 324-4GG00-3ER2
6GK5 324-4GG00-4ER2
6GK5 324-4GG00-1JR2
6GK5 324-4GG00-2JR2
6GK5 324-4GG00-3JR2
6GK5 324-4GG00-4JR2
32
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
2.2.8
Device:
X308-2M PoE
Product group X-300M PoE
Properties
4 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical
2 x 100/1000 Mbps for 2-port media modules
Order number
6GK5 308-2QG00-2AA2
Note
For more information on Power over Ethernet (PoE), refer to the Configuration Manual X-
300/X-400.
2.2.9 Product group XR-300M PoE
Device
XR324-4M PoE
Properties
1 x 24 VDC, PoE
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear.
1 x 100 to 240 VAC, PoE
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear.
1 x 24 VDC, PoE
LEDs and diagnostics port at rear, connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC, PoE
LEDs and diagnostics port on front, connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
XR324-4M PoE TS 1 x 24 VDC, PoE, module varnished
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear.
Note
Order number
6GK5 324-4QG00-1AR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-3AR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-1HR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-3HR2
6GK5 324-4QG00-1CR2
For more information on Power over Ethernet (PoE), refer to the Configuration Manual X-
300/X-400.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
33
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
2.2.10 SFP transceiver
SFP transceiver
Type
SFP991-1 *
SFP991-1 (C) *
SFP991-1LD *
Properties
1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical for glass FO cable
(multimode), up to max. 5 km
1 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 5 km, varnished
1 x 100 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable
(single mode) up to max. 26 km
SFP991-1LD (C) *
SFP991-1LH+ *
1 x 100 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable
(single mode) up to max. 26 km, varnished
1 x 100 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable
(single mode) up to max. 70 km
SFP991-1ELH200 * 1 x 100 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable
(single mode) up to max. 200 km
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m
1 x 1000 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable (single mode) up to max. 10 km
SFP992-1LD (C)
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
1 x 1000 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable (single mode) up to max. 10 km, varnished
1 x 1000 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable (single mode) up to max. 40 km
1 x 1000 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable (single mode) up to max. 70 km
1 x 1000 Mbps LC port optical for glass FO cable (single mode) up to max. 120 km
Article number
6GK5 991-1AD00-8AA0
6GK5 991-1AD00-8FA0
6GK5 991-1AF00-8AA0
6GK5 991-1AF00-8FA0
6GK5 991-1AE00-8AA0
6GK5 991-1AE30-8AA0
6GK5 992-1AL00-8AA0
6GK5 992-1AM00-8AA0
6GK5 992-1AM00-8FA0
6GK5 992-1AN00-8AA0
6GK5 992-1AP00-8AA0
6GK5 992-1AQ00-8AA0
* Cannot be operated in SFP+ slots.
Media modules
Note
The SFP media modules MM992-2SFP may only be fitted with approved transceivers. The media module can be fitted with up to two pluggable transceivers.
The SFP media modules MM992-4SFP may only be fitted with approved transceivers. The media module can be fitted with up to four pluggable transceivers.
34
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Type Properties Article number
MM992-2SFP 2 x 100 / 1000 Mbps, SFP media module 6GK5 992-2AS00-
8AA0
MM992-4SFP 4 x 100 / 1000 Mbps, SFP media module 6GK5 992-4AS00-
8AA0
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Labeling on the device
9922AS
9924AS
2.2.11 MM900 media modules
Note
Type designation and labeling of a media module differ
Example: The device with order number 6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0 is called "MM992-2SFP", the labeling on the device is "9922AS".
The labeling on the devices is shown in bold face in the following table following the [order numbers].
Note
Media modules for SFP transceivers
Only the media modules MM992-2SFP andMM992-2SFP (C) may be fitted with approved
SFP transceivers. These SFP media modules can be fitted with up to two SFPs.
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
Note
Supplement (C) in the type name
Media modules with the supplement (C) in the type name have varnished printed circuit boards (conformal coating).
Properties
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar, varnished
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 port electrical without securing collar
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical, varnished
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar, variable distance
Order number
Labeling on the device
6GK5 992-2GA00-8AA0
9922GA
6GK5 992-2GA00-8FA0
9922GA
6GK5 992-2SA00-8AA0
9922SA
6GK5 992-2HA00-0AA0
9922HA
6GK5 992-2VA00-8AA0
9922VA
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
35
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Media module
MM992-2SFP
MM992-2SFP (C)
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM991-2P
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Properties
2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module
2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module, varnished
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode) with diagnostics up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 26 km
2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 26 km
2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 70 km
2 x 100 Mbps SC RJ ports optical for Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to max. 50 m or Polymer Cladded Fiber (PCF) up to max. 100 m
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (multimode), up to max. 750 m, varnished
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 10 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 40 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 70 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable (single mode), up to max. 120 km
Order number
Labeling on the device
6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0
9922AS
6GK5 992-2AS00-8FA0
9922AS
6GK5 991-2AB00-8AA0
9912AB
6GK5 991-2AB01-8AA0
9912AB
6GK5 991-2AC00-8AA0
9912AC
6GK5 991-2AD00-8AA0
9912AD
6GK5 991-2AF00-8AA0
9912AF
6GK5 991-2AE00-8AA0
9912AE
6GK5 991-2AH00-8AA0
9912AH
6GK5 992-2AL00-8AA0
9922AL
6GK5 992-2AL00-8FA0
9922AL
6GK5 992-2AM00-8AA0
9922AM
6GK5 992-2AN00-8AA0
9922AN
6GK5 992-2AP00-8AA0
9922AP
6GK5 992-2AQ00-8AA0
9922AQ
36
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
Type key for the MM900 media modules
The type designation of an MM900 media module is made up of several parts that have the following meaning:
Interface
[-]
LD
(SC)
LD (SC)
LH+ (SC)
P
FM
Property
BFOC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable
BFOC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable
SC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 5 km)
SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 26 km)
SC port 100 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km)
SC RJ port 100 Mbps POF or PCF
BFOC port 100 Mbps multimode FO cable with diagnostics
[-]
LD
LH
LH+
ELH
SFP
Interface
CU
CUC
M12
VD
Property
RJ-45 port electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps without securing collar
RJ-45 port electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps with securing collar
M12 connection electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps
RJ-45 port electrical 10/100/1000 Mbps with securing collar (up to max. 1000 m)
SC port 1000 Mbps multimode FO cable (up to max. 750 m)
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 10km)
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 40 km)
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 70 km)
SC port 1000 Mbps single mode FO cable (up to max. 120 km)
SFP media module
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
37
Introduction
2.2 Product overview
38
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Network topologies
3
3.1 Linear structure
Functional description
Linear structures can be created with the IE Switches X-300. The cascading depth and total span of a network are limited only by the signal propagation times of the communication connections.
Properties of the linear structure
Each IE Switch X-300 communicates over a TP or FO cable with a neighboring Ethernet switch. Communication is possible over the optical or the electrical ports.
Configuration example
Sample configuration with SCALANCE X308-2, SIMATIC S7-300/400 and operator panel as end devices.
Image 3-1 Linear structure (optical)
3.2 Star/tree structure
Functional description
Star/tree structures can be created with the IE Switches X-300. The cascading depth and total span of a network are limited only by the signal propagation times of the communication connections.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
39
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager
Properties of a star structure
Each IE Switch X-300 communicates over a TP or FO cable with a central switch with which all other switches are also connected within a star structure. Communication is possible over the optical or the electrical ports.
Configuration example
Sample electrical configurations with SCALANCE X310, SCALANCE X-200, SIMATIC S7-
300/400, SIMATIC ET 200, and operator panels as end devices.
Image 3-2 Star structure (electrical)
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager
Ring with redundancy manager
To increase availability, linear topologies of up to 100 switches can be closed to form a ring:
● Optical: SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-300, SCALANCE X-200
● Electrical: SCALANCE X-400, SCALANCE X-300, SCALANCE X-200 or ESM
Functional description
The two ends of the bus are closed to form a ring by a IE Switch X-300 operating as a redundancy manager. Both the redundancy manager and the other IE switches (redundancy clients) in the ring must be interconnected via their ring ports (see below).
40
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager
The redundancy manager function is enabled by the SELECT/SET button or by a setting in the software. For more detailed information, refer to the configuration manual
"SCALANCE X-300 and SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches".
In contrast to the ring ports of the redundancy clients, the ring ports of the redundancy manager are disconnected when the network is operating problem-free. The IE Switch X-300 operating in the role of redundancy manager mode monitors the connected bus over its ring ports and switches the ring ports through if there is an interruption on the connected bus; in other words, it restores a functioning bus over this substitute path. Reconfiguration is achieved within 0.3 s. As soon as the problem is eliminated, the original topology is restored; in other words, the ring ports in the redundancy manager are disconnected from each other again.
In a ring with media redundancy, only one device can operate as the redundancy manager.
Ring ports
An electrical ring with redundancy manager can be set up via the RJ-45 connectors that allow attachment of electrical (twisted pair) connections (10, 100 and/or 1000 Mbps). The
SCALANCE X310FE is an exception to this. This device only allows attachment of electrical
(twisted-pair) connections at 10 or 100 Mbps.
The use of the IE Switch X-300 in an optical ring (1000 Mbps, with SCALANCE X-300EEC
100Mbps) with a redundancy manager is also possible with the exception of the devices
SCALANCE X310 and SCALANCE X310FE.
X-304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1FE
X320-3LD FE
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
X308-2M PoE
X302-7 EEC
X307-2 EEC
XR324-12M
You can configure which ports take on the function of ring ports individually. The following table shows the factory defaults for the ring ports.
Device Factory setting for the ring ports
Electrical
Port 2 and port 3
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Port 8 and port 9
Port 8 and port 9
Optical
Port 1 and port 2
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
Port 9 and port 10
(no optical ports)
(no optical ports)
Port 1.1 and port 1.2
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
41
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager
Device
XR324-12M TS
XR324-4M EEC
XR324-4M PoE
XR324-4M PoE TS
Factory setting for the ring ports
Electrical
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Port 1 and port 2
Optical
Port 1.1 and port 1.2
Configuration example
Sample configurations with IE Switch X-300, SIMATIC S7-200/300/400, operator control and monitoring system, H system, and PC as end devices.
42
Image 3-3 Gigabit ring with redundancy manager (RM)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Network topologies
3.3 Ring with redundancy manager
Image 3-4 Ring with FO cable and redundancy manager
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
43
Network topologies
3.4 Redundant coupling of network segments
3.4 Redundant coupling of network segments
Redundant coupling of network segments
The example of redundant coupling of two network segments as shown here, for example rings with a redundancy manager, can be implemented homogeneously with all SCALANCE
X300 variants.
44
Image 3-5 Redundant coupling of two subnets in mixed operation with SCALANCE X310 and
SCALANCE X308-2
In this case, network segments are rings with a redundancy manager (RM). The rings can also be interrupted at one point (linear topology).
For a redundant link as shown in the figure, two IE Switches X-300 must be configured within a network segment. This configuration is set in Web Based Management, Command Line
Interface or using SNMP access. For more detailed information, refer to the "Configuration
Manual SCALANCE X-300 and SCALANCE X-400 Industrial Ethernet Switches". The two
IE Switches X-300 connected in the configuration exchange data frames with each other to
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Network topologies
3.4 Redundant coupling of network segments synchronize their operating statuses (one device is master and the other slave). If there are no problems, only the link from the master to the other network segment is active. If this link fails (for example due to a link-down or a device failure), the slave activates its link as long as the problem persists. Reconfiguration takes place within 0.3 s.
Note
If IE Switches X-300 or SCALANCE X408-2 devices are used exclusively for redundant coupling of the gigabit rings, the coupling links can also be designed with a gigabit transmission rate.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
45
Network topologies
3.4 Redundant coupling of network segments
46
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4
4.1 Compatibility of SCALANCE X-300
Compatibility list
Note
Modular devices (M)
The MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers are used only in modular devices (M).
The following products and devices are compatible with IE Switches X-300:
● End devices:
All SIMATIC NET products with a TP interface can be connected to the ports of
IE Switches X-300.
● Network components with a bus (linear) or star structure:
ESM/OSM
OMC (TP cable max. 6 m long)
SCALANCE X005
SCALANCE X-100
SCALANCE XB000
SCALANCE XB000G
SCALANCE X-100 media converter
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE S-600
SCALANCE W-700
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
47
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
● Network components in a ring structure with IE Switch X-300 as redundancy manager
– Electrical ring structure:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300 (it may be necessary to configure other ring ports)
SCALANCE X-400
– Optical ring structure:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300 (exceptions SCALANCE X310 and SCALANCE X310FE)
● Redundant coupling of networks
– In the network segment with the master-slave pair to be configured:
SCALANCE X-400
SCALANCE X-300
In the standby coupling also to SCALANCE X-200
– In the network segment to be coupled:
ESM/OSM
SCALANCE X-200
SCALANCE X-200IRT
SCALANCE XF200
SCALANCE XF204IRT
SCALANCE X-300
SCALANCE X-400
Note
All compatibility information assumes the correct use of the TP and FOC cables.
48
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
4.2 Product groups
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
X-300 product group
SCALANCE X304-2FE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X304-2FE provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 4 RJ-45 jacks
● 2 FO ports (for multimode fiber)
Image 4-1 X304-2FE
Column
Port number
1
P1
P2
Connection type Optical: Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
2
P3
P4
P5
P6
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
49
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.2 SCALANCE X306-1LD FE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X306-1LD FE provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 6 RJ-45 jacks
● 1 FO port (for single mode fiber)
50
Image 4-2 SCALANCE X306-1LD FE
Column
Port number
1
P1 *)
P2
P3
Connection type Electrical: Fast Ethernet
*) Optical: Fast Ethernet
2
P4
P5
P6
P7
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.3 SCALANCE X307-3 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X307-3 provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 7 RJ-45 jacks
● 3 FO ports (for multimode fiber)
Image 4-3 SCALANCE X307-3
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
P4
2
P5
P6
P7
-
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
3
P8
-
Optical: Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
51
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.4 SCALANCE X307-3LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X306-3LD provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 7 RJ-45 jacks
● 3 FO ports (for single mode fiber)
Image 4-4 SCALANCE X307-3LD
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
P4
2
P5
P6
P7
-
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
52
3
P8
-
Optical: Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.5 SCALANCE X308-2LH product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2LH provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 8 RJ-45 jacks
● 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber)
Image 4-5 SCALANCE X308-2LH
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
2
P5
P6
P7
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
3
P8
-
-
-
Electrical:
Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
Optical:
Gigabit Ethernet
53
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.6 SCALANCE X308-2LH+ product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE 308-2LH+ provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 8 RJ-45 jacks
● 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber)
Image 4-6 SCALANCE X308-2LH+
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
2
P5
P6
P7
54
3
P8
-
-
-
Electrical:
Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
Optical:
Gigabit Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.7 SCALANCE X308-2 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2 provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 8 RJ-45 jacks
● 2 FO ports (for multimode fiber)
Image 4-7 SCALANCE X308-2
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
2
P5
P6
P7
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
3
P8
-
-
-
Electrical:
Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
Optical:
Gigabit Ethernet
55
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.8 SCALANCE X308-2LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2LD provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 8 RJ-45 jacks
● 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber)
Image 4-8 SCALANCE X308-2LD
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
2
P5
P6
P7
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
56
-
-
3
P8
-
Electrical:
Gigabit Ethernet
4
P9
P10
Optical:
Gigabit Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.9 SCALANCE X310 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X310 provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 10 RJ-45 jacks
Image 4-9 SCALANCE X310
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
2
P5
P6
P3 P7
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
3
P8
-
4
P9
P10
- -
- -
Electrical: Gigabit Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
57
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.10 SCALANCE X310FE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X310FE provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 10 RJ-45 jacks
Image 4-10 SCALANCE X310FE
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
2
P5
P6
P3 P7
P4 -
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
-
-
3
P8
-
-
-
4
P9
P10
58
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.11 SCALANCE X320-1FE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X320-1 FE provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 20 RJ-45 jacks
● 1 FO port (for multimode fiber)
Image 4-11 SCALANCE X320-1 FE
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
2
P5
P6
P7
P4 P8
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
3
P9
P10
P11
P12
4
P13
P14
P15
P16
5
P17
P18
P19
P12
-
-
6
P21
-
Optical:
Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
59
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.1.12 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X320-3LD FE provides the following options for the connection of end devices or other network segments:
● 20 RJ-45 jacks
● 1 FO port (for multimode fiber)
● 2 FO ports (for single mode fiber)
60
Image 4-12 SCALANCE X320-3LD FE
Column
Port number
Connection type
1
P1
P2
P3
2
P5
P6
P7
P4 P8
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
3
P9
P10
P11
P12
4
P13
P14
P15
P16
5
P17
P18
P19
P20
6
P21
P22
P23
-
Optical:
Fast Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.2 Product group X-300M
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2M and X308-2M TS are partly modular devices and each has 8 ports.
● 4 fixed ports in the base device:
4 electrical RJ-45 jacks (with securing collars) for connection of end devices or other network segments.
● 4 modular ports via module slots:
Two media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S2) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules being used.
Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
Image 4-13 SCALANCE X308-2M with dummy covers
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
61
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Possible attachments (example)
CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.
Example of connections
62
Image 4-14 SCALANCE X308-2M with MM992-2 and MM991-2
Column
Slot number
Media modules used
Port number
1
-
2
-
3
S1
MM992-2
P5
Connection type
-
-
-
-
-
P1
P2
P3
P4
Optical:
Gigabit Ethernet
P6
4
S2
MM991-2
P7
P8
Connection type depending on module used
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.3 Product group XR-300M
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE XR324-12M is a fully modular device and has 24 ports.
● 0 fixed ports on the base device
● 24 modular ports via module slots:
12 media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S12) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are connected according to the modules being used.
Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
Image 4-15 SCALANCE XR324-12M with blind covers
Overview of the SCALANCE XR324-12M product
Device
XR324-12M
XR324-12M
XR324-12M
Variant
2 x 24 VDC
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
2 x 24 VDC
LEDs and diagnostics port on front connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
Order number
6GK5 324-0GG00-1AR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-3AR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-1HR2
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
63
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Device
XR324-12M
XR324-12M TS
Variant
1 x 100 to 240 VAC,
LEDs and diagnostics port on front connector power supply and data cable outlet at rear
2 x 24 VDC, modules varnished
LEDs, connector power supply and data cable outlet on front
Diagnostics port at rear
Order number
6GK5 324-0GG00-3HR2
6GK5 324-0GG00-1CR2
Example of a configuration
CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.
Image 4-16 SCALANCE XR324-12M with MM900
Slot number
Media modules used
Port number
Slot number
Media modules used
Port number
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC) MM991-2 (SC)
P1
S7
P2 P1
S8
P2 P1
S9
P2 P1
S10
P2
MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM992-2CUC MM991-2
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
P1
S11
P1
P2
MM991-2
P2
P1
S12
P2
MM991-2
P1 P2
64
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.4 X-300EEC product group
4.2.4.1
Variants
Characteristics of the X-300EEC product group
The SCALANCE X-300EEC is a 19"/2 device with 9 ports for the connection of end devices or other network segments. There are 2 device types with the following ports:
● SCALANCE X302-7EEC
– 2 x RJ-45 jacks
– 7 x FO ports for multimode fiber, LC connector
● SCALANCE X307-2EEC
– 7 x RJ-45 jacks
– 2 x FO ports for multimode fiber, LC connector
Device versions
The X-300EEC is available in the following alternative versions:
● Power supply
– Power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
– Multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
● Power supply unit
– Single
– Redundant
● Printed board
– Varnished (suitable for aggressive environments)
– Unvarnished
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
65
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Image 4-17 SCALANCE X302-7EEC (from below) with protective bracket and LC connector
Replacing the C-PLUG
In the X-300EEC devices, the slot for the C-PLUG is on the top on the housing.
Image 4-18 C-PLUG of the X-300EEC
NOTICE
The C-PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is turned off.
In a device with a varnished printed circuit board, you may only use a C-PLUG with a varnished board.
To remove the C-PLUG, open the slider and close it again after inserting the C-PLUG.
66
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Terminal block for signaling contact and power supply
The terminal block of the X-300EEC for connecting the signaling contact and power supply has the following terminals:
● F1, F2: Signaling contact
The 2 signaling contacts on the device version with a redundant power supply are energized in parallel.
● L1, M1: Power supply 1
● L2, M2: Power supply 2 (redundant version)
The power supply units for the power supply are available in the following versions:
– 24 to 48 VDC
– As multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
RJ-45 interface
The RJ-45 ports of the IE Switch X-300EEC are fitted with a securing bracket instead of a securing collar.
To increase mechanical stability, secure the IE FC RJ-45 PLUGs to this securing bracket with a cable binder.
LEDs of the X-300EEC
You will find the meaning of the individual LEDs in the section "LED display (Page 151)".
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
67
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Ports of the X302-7EEC
The SCALANCE X302-7EEC has the following ports:
● 2 electrical gigabit ports (P8 to P9)
● 7 optical Fast Ethernet ports (P1 to P7)
Image 4-19 SCALANCE X302-7EEC
Port number P1 P2
Connection type Optical: Fast Ethernet
P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Electrical: Gigabit
Ethernet
68
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Ports of the X307-2EEC
The SCALANCE X307-2EEC has the following ports:
● 7 electrical ports (P3 to P9)
– 5 Fast Ethernet ports (P3 to P7)
– 2 gigabit ports (P8, P9)
● 2 optical Fast Ethernet ports (P1, P2)
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Image 4-20 SCALANCE X307-2EEC
Port number P1 P2
Connection type Optical: Fast Ethernet
P3 P4
Electrical: Fast Ethernet
P5 P6 P7 P8 P9
Electrical: Gigabit
Ethernet
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
69
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.5 XR-300M EEC product group
4.2.5.1 Product characteristics of the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
Connection options with the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
The SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC is a partially modular device and has 24 ports.
● 16 fixed ports in the base device:
16 RJ-45 jacks for connection of end devices or other network segments.
● 8 modular ports via module slots:
4 modules can be combined using slots (S1-S4) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are connected according to the modules being used.
Slot number
Port number
Slot number
Port number
P1
P9
Image 4-21 XR324-4M EEC
CAUTION
Use only approved media modules
If you use media modules that are not approved by Siemens AG, there is no guarantee that the device will function according to the specification.
If you use unapproved media modules, this can lead to the following problems:
• Damage to the device
•
Loss of the approvals
•
Violation of the EMC regulations
Use only approved media modules.
P2 P3 P4
P10 P11 P12
P5 P6
P13 P14
P7 P8
P15 P16
S1
P1
S3
P1
P2
P2
S2
P1
S4
P1
P2
P2
70
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.6 Product group X-300M PoE
4.2.6.1 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SCALANCE X308-2M PoE is a partially modular device and has eight ports.
● Four fixed ports in the base device:
Four PoE-compliant ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of end devices or other network segments.
● Four modular ports via module slots:
Two media modules (optical or electrical as required) can be combined using slots (S1-
S2) depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules being used.
Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
Image 4-22 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE with dummy covers
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
71
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Possible attachments (example)
CAUTION
Use only approved media modules in the module slots
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module slot, but rather on the selected media module.
Refer to the section Media module installation in slot.
Example: Fitted with media modules MM992-2 and MM991-2
72
Column
Slot number
Media modules used
Port number
Image 4-23 SCALANCE X308-2M PoE with MM992-2 and MM992-2SFP
-
-
-
-
1
-
-
2
-
-
P1 (gigabit Ethernet)
P2 (gigabit Ethernet)
P3 (gigabit Ethernet)
P4 (gigabit Ethernet)
3
S1
MM992-2
P5 (gigabit multimode fiberoptic cable, SC ports)
P6 (gigabit multimode fiberoptic cable, SC ports)
4
S2
MM992-2SFP
P7
(interface depends on SFP used)
P8(interface depends on SFP used)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
4.2.7.1 SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE product characteristics
Connection options of the SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS switches
The switches are partly modular devices and all have 24 ports.
● 16 fixed ports on the base device:
– Ports P1 to P8
8 PoE-compliant gigabit ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of end devices or other network segments.
Non PoE-compliant end devices can also be connected to the PoE-compliant RJ-45 jacks because the switches check that the end devices are suitable for the PoE function before applying the power.
– Ports P9 to P16
8 gigabit ports (RJ-45 jacks with securing collars) for connection of end devices or other network segments (no PoE).
● 8 modular ports via 4 module slots:
4 media modules each with 2 ports are combined optically or electrically via the slots S1 to S4 depending on the application. End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules being used.
Image 4-24 XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS
CAUTION
Use only approved modules in the slots
Possible module connection types:
•
2 x RJ-45
•
2 x FX100
•
2 x FX1000
• or 2 x SFP slots
With FX, single mode fibers or multimode fibers are possible.
Connecting end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module slots.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
73
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Slot number S1 S2
Port number P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P1 P2 P1 P2
Slot number S3 S4
Port number P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P1 P2 P1 P2
Connection type
Electrical: Gigabit Ethernet Connection type depending on module used
4.2.8 MM900 media modules
4.2.8.1 MM992-2CUC product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2CUC media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
Image 4-25 MM992-2CUC [9922GA]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
Note
For connection to electrical networks note the information in Appendix A.1 and A.2.
74
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.8.2 MM992-2CU product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2CU media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 port electrical without securing collar
Image 4-26 MM992-2CU [9922SA]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
Note
For connection to electrical networks note the information in Appendix A.1 and A.2.
4.2.8.3 MM992-2VD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2VD media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
● Additional two-wire transfer function (variable distance) for establishing Ethernet connections even using cables that do not conform to Ethernet. Possible distance covered depends on the cable quality.
Image 4-27 MM992-2VD [9922VA]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
Note
For connection to electrical networks note the information in Appendix A.1 and A.2.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
75
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Pin assignment for the RJ-45 connector of a PROFIBUS cable
If you use a PROFIBUS cable along with an IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2, note the following:
RJ-45 connectors PROFIBUS cable
2
3
Pin assignment
1
6
Color
Yellow
Orange
White
Blue
Wire color
Green
Red
--
--
Note
Using PROFIBUS standard cable GP
If you use a PROFIBUS standard cable GP, the wires must be stripped before they are inserted in the FC connector.
Note
If you use cables with a length > 500 m, connection establishment can take up to 2 min.
Note
If you connect an MM992-2VD media module to existing PROFIBUS cabling, the same requirements relating to shield contact and the lightning protection concept apply as for
PROFIBUS.
4.2.8.4 MM992-2M12 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2M12 media module has the following:
● 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical
76
Image 4-28 MM992-2M12C [9922HA]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
Note
For connection to electrical networks note the information in Appendix (A.1, A.2 and A.3)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
4.2.8.5
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
MM992-2SFP / MM992-2SFP (C) product properties
Note
Only the media modules MM992-2SFP / M992-2SFP (C) may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The SFP media modules can be fitted with up to two SFPs.
Possible attachments
The media modules MM992-2SFP / M992-2SFP (C) have:
● 2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP slot
Image 4-29 MM992-2SFP [9922AS]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.6 MM991-2 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2 media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 5 km
Image 4-30 MM991-2 [9912AB]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
77
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.8.7 MM991-2FM product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2FM media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical (multimode, glass) with diagnostics up to max. 5 km
Image 4-31 MM991-2FM [9912AB]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.8 MM991-2LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2LD media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 26 km
Image 4-32 MM991-2LD [9912AC]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
78
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
4.2.8.9 MM991-2 (SC) product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2 (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (multimode glass), up to max. 5 km
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Image 4-33 MM991-2 (SC) [9912AD]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.10 MM991-2LD (SC) product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2LD (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 26 km
Image 4-34 MM991-2LD (SC) [9912AF]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
79
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.8.11 MM991-2LH+ (SC) product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2LH+ (SC) media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 70 km
Image 4-35 MM991-2LH+ (SC) [9912AE]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.12 MM991-2P product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM991-2P media module has the following:
● 2 x 100 Mbps SC RJ ports optical for Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to max. 50 m or
Polymer Cladded Fiber (PCF) up to max. 100 m
Image 4-36 MM991-2P [9912AH]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
80
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Note
Installation of the XR-300M, XR-300M PoE and XR-300M EEC
Only the lower slots may be equipped with the MM991-2P.
• XR-300M: Maximum 6 modules in slots 7 to 12
•
XR-300M PoE, XR-300M EEC: Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4
The slot above an MM991-2P may only be used as follows:
• Without media module
•
With media module MM992-2CUC or MM992-2CU
Example XR-300M: If the MM991-2P is plugged into slot 8, an MM992-2CUC may be used in slot 2.
See also table: "Operating temperature with media module MM991-2P"
4.2.8.13 MM992-2 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2 media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (multimode glass), up to max. 750 m
Image 4-37 MM992-2 [9922AL]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
81
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.8.14 MM992-2LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2LD media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 10 km
Image 4-38 MM992-2LD [9922AM]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.15 MM992-2LH product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2LH media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 40 km
Image 4-39 MM992-2LH [9922AN]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
82
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.8.16 MM992-2LH+ product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2LH+ media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 70 km
Image 4-40 MM992-2LH+ [9922AP]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
4.2.8.17 MM992-2ELH product characteristics
Possible attachments
The MM992-2ELH media module has the following:
● 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC port optical, (single mode glass), up to max. 120 km
4.2.8.18
Image 4-41 MM992-2ELH [9922AQ]
[Device labeling in square brackets]
General notes on MM900
Note
Use media modules only in an approved modular device ("M")
Use an MM900 media module only in a device equipped with suitable slots for such modules. Example: X308-2M.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
83
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
The MM900 media module decides what can be connected
The connection of end devices or other network segments does not depend on the module slot, but rather on the selected MM900 media module.
Possible attachment
Electrical RJ-45 ports with securing collar
Figure
Electrical RJ-45 ports without securing collar
GE M12 connector electrical
BFOC ports optical
Optical SC ports
SFP transceivers
Only the SFP media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.
SC RJ ports optical
84
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
4.2.9 SFP transceiver
4.2.9.1 SCALANCE SFP991-1 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP991-1 transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 3 km
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
Image 4-42 SFP991-1
4.2.9.2 SCALANCE SFP991-1LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP991-1LD transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 26 km
Image 4-43 SFP991-1LD
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
85
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.9.3 SCALANCE SFP991-1LH+ product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP991-1LH+ transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 70 km
Image 4-44 SFP991-1LH+
4.2.9.4 SCALANCE SFP992-1 product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP992-1 transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (multimode, glass) up to max. 750 m
Image 4-45 SFP992-1
4.2.9.5 SCALANCE SFP992-1LD product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LD transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 10 km
86
Image 4-46 SFP992-1LD
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.9.6 SCALANCE SFP992-1LH product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LH transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 40 km
Image 4-47 SFP992-1LH
4.2.9.7 SCALANCE SFP992-1LH+ product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP992-1LH+ transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 70 km
Image 4-48 SFP992-1LH+
4.2.9.8 SCALANCE SFP992-1ELH product characteristics
Possible attachments
The SFP992-1ELH transceiver has the following:
● 1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical (single mode, glass) up to max. 120 km
Image 4-49 SFP992-1ELH
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
87
Description of the device
4.2 Product groups
4.2.9.9
Device:
Media module
MM992-2SFP
General notes on SFP
Note
Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFP transceivers. The
SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.
(Variant)
(2 x 100/1000 Mbps,
SFP media module)
[Order number]
Labeling on the device
[6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0]
9922AS
Figure
Note
An SFP with multimode has a black clip and an SFP with single mode has a blue clip. To protect the pins, these are fitted with a dummy plug.
4.2.9.10 Supported wavelengths of the SFPs
Pluggable transceiver
SFP SFP991-1
SFP991-1 (C)
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LD (C)
SFP991-1LH+
SFP991-1ELH200
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LD (C)
SFP992-1LH
SFP+
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
SFP993-1
SFP993-1LD
SFP993-1LH
Supported wavelength
1310 nm
1550 nm
850 nm
1310 nm
1550 nm
850 nm
1310 nm
1550 nm
88
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
SCP
STP
SCP992-1
SCP992-1LD
STP991-1
STP991-1LD
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
850 nm
1310 nm
1310 nm
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
4.3.1 Ethernet interfaces - electrical ports
4.3.1.1 10Base-T / 100Base-TX
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the electrical ports is 10 Mbps or as Fast Ethernet ports 100 Mbps.
Transmission mode
The transmission mode for 10Base-T / 100Base-TX is specified in the IEEE 802.3i / IEEE
802.3u standards of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Autonegotiation (automatic detection of the best transmission modes) is default. The order in which they are selected is:
● 100Base-TX full duplex
● 100Base-TX half duplex
● 10Base-T full duplex
● 10Base-T half duplex
Two communication modes are possible:
● Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode - it is only possible to either send or receive over the interfaces at any one time.
● Full duplex mode
Two-way simultaneous - both communication partners can send and receive at the same time.
Connections to other switches can use half or full duplex; connections to hubs are possible only in half duplex mode.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
89
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
Transmission medium
Data transmission at 10 Mbps and at 100 Mbps is over two wire pairs (pin 1, 2, 3, 6) of the twisted pair cable. For 10 Mbps, at least a category 3 (Cat 3) and for 100 Mbps, at least a four-wire (2 x 2) category 5 (Cat 5) cable is necessary.
Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 100 m.
Connectors
A node or network segment is connected to an 8-pin RJ-45 jack with securing collar. Due to its flush fitting with an IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 / IE FC RJ45 Plug 145 connector, the securing collar ensures a robust connection suitable for industry that provides tensile and bending strain relief for the inserted connector.
Note
The RJ-45 jacks of the SCALANCE X300EEC variants do not have a securing collar. The tensile and bending relief are provided by the securing bracket using a cable binder, see also
section Signaling contact (Page 145).
4.3.1.2 1000Base-T
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the electrical Ethernet ports is 10 Mbps, as Fast Ethernet ports 100
Mbps or as gigabit ports 1 Gbps.
Transmission mode
The transmission mode for 1000Base-T is specified in the IEEE 802.3ab standard.
Autonegotiation (automatic detection of the best transmission mode) is default.
The order in which they are selected is:
● 1000Base-T full duplex
● 1000Base-T half duplex
● 100Base-TX full duplex
● 100Base-TX half duplex
● 10Base-T full duplex
● 10Base-T half duplex
90
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
Two communication modes are possible:
● Half duplex
Two-way alternate transmission mode - it is only possible to either send or receive over the interfaces at any one time.
● Full duplex mode
Two-way simultaneous - both communication partners can send and receive at the same time.
Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over an eight-wire twisted pair cable.
Note
For data transmission at 1 Gbps, at least a Cat 5e twisted-pair cable with 4 x 2 wires is necessary. With a four-wire cable (2 x 2 wires), a maximum data transmission rate of 100
Mbps is possible.
Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 100 m.
Connectors
The connectors used are 8-pin RJ-45 jacks.
4.3.1.3 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
With PoE, the power for networked devices is carried via Ethernet. Here, there are two methods of supplying power:
● Alternative A
Here, the voltage is transferred on the data wires 1, 2, 3 and 6 of the Ethernet cable
Requirements for the Ethernet cable:
– For 10Base-T/100Base-TX, a 4-wire cable is adequate for data transmission and power supply.
– With 1000BASE-T, an 8-wire cable is necessary for data transmission.
● Alternative B
Power is transferred on the free wires 4, 5, 7 and 8 of the Ethernet cable.
Requirements for the Ethernet cable: For 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000BASE-T, an 8-wire cable is needed.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
91
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
PoE-compliant devices can be divided into the following groups:
● PSE - power sourcing equipment
These inject power onto the Ethernet cable.
● PD - powered devices
These are supplied with power via Ethernet.
4.3.1.4 Ports of the X308-2M PoE
The PoE ports of the switch
As a PSE, the X308-2M PoE supplies PoE-compliant devices with power over Ethernet. The
48 V power required to supply the powered devices is generated internally on the switch, no extra power supply unit is necessary.
The X308-2M PoE uses the "alternative A" for this. Per RJ-45 port, a maximum of 15.4 W are available for supplying a PoE-compliant device. If a Cat5/Cat5e cable with a maximum length of 100 m is used, the connected device can be supplied with a power of 12.95 W.
Note
The total power provided by the SCALANCE X308-2M PoE on all four PoE ports is a maximum of 30.8 W.
The PoE ports meet the conditions listed in the IEEE 802.3af / IEEE 802.3at standard
(type 1) for environment A , in other words power supply over Ethernet within a power supply system. For details of configuring and enabling PoE for individual ports, refer to the configuration manual SCALANCE X-300 / X-400 on the accompanying CD.
Possible attachments
The X308-2M PoE is a partially modular device and has 4 fixed ports and 2 slots for media modules.
● 4 electrical ports
4 PoE-compliant RJ-45 jacks with securing collars for connection of end devices or network segments. Non PoE-compliant end devices can also be connected to the PoEcompliant RJ-45 jacks because the X308-2M PoE checks that the end devices are suitable for the PoE function before applying the power.
● 4 modular ports via 2 module slots
2 media modules each with 2 ports are combined optically or electrically via the slots S1 and S2 depending on the application.
End devices and other network segments are connected according to the media modules being used.
92
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
4.3.1.5 PoE ports
PoE ports of the SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS switches
As PSEs, these devices supply PoE-compliant devices with power over Ethernet. The power required to supply the powered devices is generated internally on the switches, no extra power supply unit is necessary.
The switches use the "Alternative A" method. Per RJ-45 port, a maximum of 15.4 W are available for supplying a PoE-compliant device. If a Cat5/Cat5e cable with a maximum length of 100 m is used, the connected device can be supplied with a power of 12.95 W.
Note
The total power provided by the switches on all eight PoE ports is a maximum of 53.2 W.
The PoE ports meet the conditions listed in the IEEE 802.3af / IEEE 802.3at standard
(type 1) for environment A , in other words power supply over Ethernet within a power supply system. For details of configuring and enabling PoE for individual ports, refer to the configuration manual SCALANCE X-300 / X-400 on the accompanying CD.
4.3.1.6 Isolation between the TP ports
All ports meet the requirement of 1.5 kV isolation voltage to the shield and between the ports
(corresponds to IEEE802.3, Environment B).
Note
Exceptions are X307-3, X307-3LD, X308-2, X308-2LD, X308-2LH, X308-2LH+, X310,
X310FE
The following port group is an exception to this:
• Port group 1: P1, P2, P3 and P4
Between the ports of port group 1, the requirements for Environment A are met.
4.3.2 Ethernet interfaces - optical ports
4.3.2.1 1000Base-SX
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the optical gigabit ports is 1 Gbps.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
93
Description of the device
4.3 Interfaces and signaling contact of the switches
Transmission mode
Transmission with 1000Base-SX is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard and is specified as
1000 Mbps transmission rate and full duplex.
Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over multimode FOC. The wavelength is 850 nm.
The core diameter of the multimode FOC is 50 µm; the light source is an LED. Many modes
(light beams) are used for signal transmission. The propagation times of the light pulses
(dispersion) restrict the maximum range considerably.
Transmission range
The maximum transmission range (segment length) is 750 m when using SIMATIC NET fiber-optic multimode FOC with SC duplex connectors.
Connectors
SC duplex female connectors are used.
On the IE Switches X-300EEC, devices are connected via LC jacks.
4.3.2.2 1000Base-LX / 100Base-FX
Transmission rate
The transmission rate of the optical gigabit ports is 1 Gbps.
Transmission mode
Transmission with 1000Base-LX is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard and is specified as
1000 Mbps transmission rate and full duplex.
Transmission medium
Data is transmitted over single mode FOC. The wavelength is 1310 nm or 1550 nm.
The core diameter of the single mode FO cable is 9 or 10 µm; the light source is a laser diode. To transmit a signal, only one mode (light beam) is used greatly reducing dispersion.
As a result, the maximum range of single mode FOC is greater than that of multimode FOC.
Transmission range
The maximum transmission distance (segment length) is 120 km for 1000Base-LX transmission.
94
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
IE Switches X-300 connector technology
SC duplex female connectors are used.
Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)
Connector technology of the IE Switch X-300EEC
FC duplex female connectors with the following characteristics are used:
● Maximum range: up to 3 km
● Wavelength: 1310 nm
● Transmission mode: Multimode
● Standard: 100Base-FX
4.3.3 Signaling contact
The signaling contact (relay contact) is a floating switch with which error/fault states can be signaled by breaking the contact.
Error indication
● The signaling by the signaling contact is synchronized with the fault LED, in other words, all errors displayed by this LED (freely configurable) are also signaled on the signaling contact.
● If an internal fault occurs, the fault LED lights up and the signaling contact opens.
● The connection or disconnection of a communication node on an unmonitored port does not lead to an error message.
● The signaling contact remains activated until the error/fault is eliminated or until the current status is entered in the fault mask as the new desired status.
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)
NOTICE
DO NOT REMOVE C-PLUG WHILE POWER IS ON
The C-PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the power supply to the device is turned off.
In a device with a varnished printed circuit board, you may only use a C-PLUG with a varnished board.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
95
Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)
Area of application
The C-PLUG is an exchangeable medium for storage of the configuration data of the IE
Switch and ships with the product. This means that the configuration data remains available if the IE Switch is replaced.
How it works
Power is supplied by the IE Switch. The C-PLUG retains all data permanently when the power is turned off.
If an empty C-PLUG (factory settings or deleted with the Clean function) is inserted, all the configuration data of the IE Switch is saved to it automatically when the device starts up.
Changes to the configuration during operation without operator intervention are saved on the
C-PLUG if this is in the "ACCEPTED" status.
An IE Switch with an accepted C-PLUG inserted uses the configuration data of the C-PLUG automatically when it starts up. Acceptance is possible only when the data was written by a compatible device type.
This allows an IE Switch to be replaced quickly and simply. The C-PLUG is taken from the failed component and inserted in the replacement. The first time it is started up, the replacement device has the same configuration as the failed device except for the MAC address set by the vendor.
Diagnostics
Inserting a C-PLUG that does not contain the configuration of a compatible device type, accidentally removing the C-PLUG or general malfunctions of the C-PLUG are signaled by the diagnostics mechanisms of the IE Switch (LEDs, WEB-based management, SNMP, CLI and PROFINET diagnostics).
96
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Inserting in the C-PLUG slot on the IE Switch X-300
Product group
X-300
X-300M
Slot
Rear of the device
Figure
Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)
C-PLUG
1. Remove the screw cover.
2. Insert the C-PLUG in the intended slot.
3. Close the screw cover again correctly.
XR-300M Rear of the device
- right
X-300EEC Top of the housing
1. Remove the cover.
2. Insert the C-PLUG in the intended slot.
3. Close the cover again correctly.
1. Open the slider.
2. Insert the C-PLUG.
3. Close the slider.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
97
Description of the device
4.4 C-PLUG (configuration plug)
Removing the C-PLUG from the IE Switch X-300
It is only necessary to remove the C-PLUG if the IE Switch develops a fault.
The C-PLUG can be removed from the slot using flat pliers, tweezers, or a small screwdriver.
Product group
X-300
X-300M
Slot
Rear of the device
Figure
1. Remove the screw cover.
2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the screw cover again correctly.
XR-300M Rear of the device
- right
X-300EEC Top of the housing
1. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the cover again correctly.
1. Open the slider.
2. Remove the C-PLUG.
3. Close the slider.
98
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
4.5 Components of the product
Unpacking, checking
1. Make sure that the package is complete.
2. Check all the parts for transport damage.
WARNING
Do not use any parts that show evidence of damage!
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
4.5.1 Components of the product
The following components are supplied with a SCALANCE X-300:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
● A four-pin terminal block for the 24 VDC power supply.
● A two-pin terminal block for the signaling contact.
● Product CD with documentation and software.
4.5.2 X-300M components of the product
Note
When shipped, all devices have a C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
Note
Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular devices
(M).
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
99
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
Table 4- 1 Overview of the components shipped with the X-300M product group
Device:
SCALANCE
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
Variant
(-)
(-)
Plug-in terminal block
Signaling contact
2-pin
2-pin
Power supply
4-pin (24 V)
4-pin (12 V)
Device
●
●
BAK
●
●
Product CD
●
●
4.5.3 Components of the XR-300M product
Note
When shipped, the slots for the media modules have dummy covers fitted.
Note
Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular devices
(M).
The following parts ship with a SCALANCE XR-300M:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack installation.
● A two-pin terminal block for the signaling contact.
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port.
● Adhesive feet for desktop operation.
● Product CD with documentation and software.
For devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply also:
● A two-pin connector for the power supply.
For devices with a 24 VDC power supply, also:
● A four-pin terminal block for the power supply.
100
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
4.5.4 X-300EEC product components
Apart from the device itself, the following components are also supplied with the switch:
Table 4- 2 Overview of the components shipped with the X-300EEC product group
Device:
SCALANCE
(variants)
C-PLUG
Components of the product
Plug-in terminal block
Signaling contact with contact pins
DC
Power
24 to 48 V
AC
100 to 240 V
/ DC
60 to 250 V
X302-7EEC
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC,
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
X307-2EEC
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1 x 2-pin
2 x 2-pin
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
1 x 2-pin
2 x 2-pin
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
1 x 4-pin
2 x 4-pin
-
-
1 x 4-pin
2 x 4-pin
-
-
-
-
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
-
-
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
Product CD
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
4.5.5 Components of the XR-300M EEC product
Note
•
When shipped, all devices have a C-PLUG exchangeable medium.
• When shipped, the slots for the media modules have a dummy cover fitted.
•
Labels to identify the installed MM900 media modules are supplied with the modular devices.
The consignment of a SCALANCE XR-300M EEC consist of the device itself and the following parts:
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack installation
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port
● Operating Instructions (compact) SCALANCE XR-300 M EEC.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
101
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
● With devices with power supply 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
– A 3-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the signaling contacts.
– A 3-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the power supply.
● With devices with 24 to 48 VDC power supply:
– A 2-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the signaling contacts.
– A 4-pin terminal block (or two terminal blocks for redundant power supply) for the power supply.
4.5.6
Interfaces
Components of the X308-2M PoE product
Type
X308-2M PoE
RJ-45 port electrical
10/100/1000 Mbps
4
Components of the product
The following parts ship with a SCALANCE X-300M PoE:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
● 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● Product CD with documentation and software
Order numbers
Type
X308-2M PoE
Order number
6GK5 308-2QG00-2AA2
Module slots
2
102
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
4.5.7 Components of the XR-324-4M PoE product
Components that ship with the SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS switches
The following components ship with a SCALANCE XR324-4M PoE or XR324-4M PoE TS:
● Device with C-PLUG exchangeable medium
● 2 mounting brackets and 8 screws (M3x5 recessed head, drive: Torx) for 19" rack installation
● Connecting cable for the diagnostics port
● Product CD with documentation and software
● For devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply:
– A 2-pin terminal block for the power supply
– A 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
● With devices with 24 V DC power supply:
– 4-pin terminal block for the power supply
– 2-pin terminal block for the signaling contact
– 4 adhesive feet for desktop mounting
4.5.8 Components shipped with the MM900 product
The following components are supplied with a SCALANCE MM900 media module:
● MM99x-2xx media module
Note
Identification labels
The location labels identify the media modules and ship with the SCALANCE device.
4.5.9 Components shipped with the SFP product
Table 4- 3 Overview of the components shipped with the SFP product group
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
(Variant)
(-)
(-)
(-)
Plug-in terminal block
(signaling contact)
2-pin
-
-
-
(24V)
4-pin
-
-
-
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Device
●
●
●
Product CD
-
-
-
103
Description of the device
4.5 Components of the product
(Variant) Device:
Transceiver
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
(-)
Plug-in terminal block
(signaling contact)
2-pin
-
-
-
-
-
(24V)
4-pin
-
-
-
-
-
Device
●
●
●
●
●
Product CD
-
-
-
-
-
104
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Installation
5
You will find detailed instructions on connecting up the power supply and the signaling
contact in the section Connecting (Page 127).
WARNING
Installation guidelines and safety notices
When installing and operating the device, keep to the installation instructions and safety-
related notices as described here (section Safety instructions (Page 15)) and in the manual
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Twisted Pair and Fiber Optic Networks (see Preface
Installation location and temperatures above 55 °C
When installing the device, select a location where only qualified service personnel or trained users have access to it.
If the device is operated in an ambient temperature of more than 55 °C, the temperature of the device housing may be higher than 70 °C.
Provide suitable shade to protect the IE Switch X-300 against direct sunlight. This avoids unnecessary warming of the IE Switches X-300 and prevents premature aging of the
IE Switch X-300 and cabling.
Use of approved components
•
Use only approved components, for example supporting brackets, SFPs, 19 inch racks.
•
Create any supports you require according the drawings in section Graphics
Note
Suitable spare parts
You will find the list with the spare parts on the pages of Siemens Industry Automation
Customer Support under the following entry ID: 60700974
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60700974 )
Unless stated otherwise, the mounting options listed below apply to all IE Switch X-300.
Mounting position of the IE Switch X-300EEC
NOTICE
Only the normal mounting position with the cable outlets downwards is permitted.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
105
Installation
5.1 Overview of the methods of installation
Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch X-300EEC in enclosures without forced ventilation or cooling, minimum clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure.
By keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring devices.
Table 5- 1 Minimum clearances when installing the X-300EEC
Minimum clearance to devices below the switch
Minimum clearance to devices above the switch
Minimum clearance at the sides
100 mm
100 mm
20 mm
5.1 Overview of the methods of installation
Installing the switches
IE Switches X-300 can be installed in various ways:
● Installation on a 35 mm DIN rail
● Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
● Wall mounting
● 19" rack mounting (SCALANCE XR300)
For the possible types of installation, refer to section Technical specifications (Page 155)
Note
Standard rail and wall mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
With the X-300EEC, note the special features in the relevant subsection on standard rail or wall mounting.
Media modules and SFP transceivers
Media modules and SFP transceivers are used in modular devices.
● Media modules are used in the appropriate slots of the switch.
● SFP transceivers are used only in SFP media modules.
106
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
5.2
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
Installing a switch
CAUTION
Electrical connections
Make sure that the power supply of the switch is turned off when fitting the connectors for the power supply and the signaling contacts.
For information on the electrical connections, refer to Section Connecting (Page 127).
5.2.1
Installation
Installation on a DIN rail
WARNING
No installation on a 35 mm DIN rail in shipbuilding
In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
This applies to all devices with this notice in the "Installation options" table in the section
"Technical specifications" (subsection, "Construction, installation and environment").
Install the IE Switch X-300 on a 35 mm DIN rail complying with DIN EN 60715.
1. Hang the IE Switch X-300 on the DIN rail and then push it in against the rail until it clips into place.
2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 130).
3. Fit the connectors for the power supply.
4. Fit the connectors for the signaling contact.
5. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.
Image 5-1 Mounting an IE Switch X-300 on a DIN rail (35 mm)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
107
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
Uninstalling
To remove an IE Switch X-300 from the DIN rail:
1. Disconnect all cables from the switch.
2. Release the lower part of the IE Switch X-300 from the DIN rail with a screwdriver and pull the lower part of the switch away from the DIN rail.
Image 5-2 Removing an IE Switch X-300 from a DIN rail (35 mm)
DIN rail mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
CAUTION
Grounding
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing. Grounding via the DIN rail alone is not adequate.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect protective ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.
Removing the IE Switch X-300EEC
1. Push the X-300EEC down.
2. Swing the device upwards.
No tools are necessary for removing the device.
5.2.2 Installation on a standard rail
Installation on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
1. Hang the upper guide at the top of the switch housing onto the S7 standard rail.
2. Screw the IE Switch X-300 to the underside of the standard rail.
3. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 130).
4. Connect the power supply to the appropriate terminal block.
108
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
5. Connect the cable for the signaling contact to the appropriate terminal block.
6. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.
Note
Standard rail mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
The IE Switch X-300EEC can only be mounted on an S7-300 standard rail using a commercially available adapter.
Image 5-3 Installing an IE Switch X-300 on a SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail
CAUTION
Grounding of the X-300EEC
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect protective ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.
Uninstalling
To remove an IE Switch X-300 from the SIMATIC S7-300 standard rail, follow these steps:
1. Disconnect all connected cables.
2. Loosen the screws on the underside of the standard rail and lift the IE Switch X-300 away from the rail.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
109
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
5.2.3 Wall mounting
Wall mounting
Note
Installation fittings
When mounting on a wall, use mounting fittings suitable for the type of wall. For example, to secure to concrete:
•
4 wall plugs, 6 mm in diameter and 30 mm long
• 4 screws 3.5 mm in diameter and 40 mm long
The wall mounting must be capable of supporting at least four times the weight of the
IE Switch X-300.
1. Mount the switch on the wall.
2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the description in the section
Connecting the grounding (Page 130).
3. Connect the power supply to the appropriate terminal block.
4. Connect the cable for the signaling contact to the appropriate terminal block.
5. Insert the terminal blocks into the sockets on the IE Switch X-300.
CAUTION
Grounding of the X-300EEC
The device is grounded via the bolts in the floor of the housing.
On the X-300EEC with power supply 100...240 V AC, you must always connect protective ground via the bolts on the bottom of the device housing.
Note
For precise dimensions, refer to the dimension drawings in section Graphics (Page 283).
Note
Wall mounting of a rack device
For wall mounting of a rack device (R), use suitable fittings such as a mounting bracket.
Wall mounting of the IE Switch X-300EEC
To mount the IE Switch X-300EEC on a wall, you require an additional securing bracket. You
will find the dimensions for a suitable securing bracket in section Graphics (Page 283).
110
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
5.2.4 19" rack mounting
WARNING
Use of approved components
• Use only approved 19" cabinets.
•
Use only supplied mounting brackets.
There are several ways of fixing the mounting brackets depending on the mounting position required.
19" rack mounting
19" rack mounting is possible for all rack devices identified by (XR).
Refer to the technical specifications, Installation options table for each product group. The rack device (R) is installed using two mounting brackets fitted to the front. After fitting the two mounting brackets, the rack device can then be installed in a 19" cabinet.
NOTICE
Do not cover the ventilation grilles
During installation, select a mounting position so that the ventilation grilles are always free to achieve adequate cooling. With normal orientation, the ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the housing.
If you install more than one rack device, make sure that the permitted ambient conditions are met for all devices in the rack.
Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch in rack devices without forced ventilation or cooling, minimum clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure. By keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring devices.
Table 5- 2 Minimum clearances for installation in rack devices
Minimum clearance to devices below the switch
Minimum clearance to devices above the switch
Minimum clearance between two SCALANCE XR-300s at an ambient temperature up to 70 °C without external ventilation
Minimum clearance between two SCALANCE XR-300s at an ambient temperature up to 60 °C without external ventilation
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
45 mm (1 height unit)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
111
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
NOTICE
Four-point mounting
If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more detailed information in the section "Mechanical stability in operation".
Normal orientation
Normal orientation of the device
• The LED display is on the left of the front panel of the housing.
•
To the right of the LED display, the SCALANCE XR-300 has connectors for the signaling contacts and the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE XR-300 is available for different power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).
•
The Ethernet ports or the slots for the modules are also on the front of the housing. Slots for the modules are fitted with dummy covers.
•
The C-PLUG is on the right behind a protective panel secured with screws.
(For more detailed information, refer to the section on the C-
PLUG in the X-300 operating instructions.)
• The ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the housing.
•
On the back of the housing, you will find the diagnostics port
of the device. (For more details, refer to Diagnostics port
XR-300.) On the SCALANCE X-300M EEC, you will also find the connectors for the signaling contacts and power supply here.
112
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
19" rack mounting with normal orientation
19" rack mounting
1. Select the required rack device (R) and the 19" cabinet.
2. Fix the two mounting brackets with 4 screws each to the sides of the housing. The maximum tightening torque for these screws is 0.5 Nm.
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
3.
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION: If you install a rack device (R) with components inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the rack device (R) (for example the handles of media modules or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
Insert the rack device (R) in the 19" cabinet and hold the rack device (R) at the required height. Make sure that nothing is obstructing air from entering the ventilation grilles.
Fit the securing screws to the two mounting brackets to secure the rack device (R) in the 19" cabinet.
Connect the grounding bolts. On the SCALANCE X-
300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the device. On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE connector is on the rear of the device between the power connectors.
Fit the connectors for the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE X-300 is available for different power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).
Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling contact.
Example of individual installation
Note
Individual installation of the SCALANCE XR-300M
Devices of the XR-300M category can also be installed upright in a cabinet door. In this case, the LED display is at the front and the data cable outlet at the back at the cabinet door.
Make sure that the mounting bracket is correctly positioned on the rack device (R) so that the rack device (R) can be mounted securely on the cabinet door.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
113
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
Desktop operation (only 24 V DC variants with adhesive feet)
CAUTION
No desktop operation for devices with 100 to 240 V AC power supply
Desktop operation is permitted only for the 24 VDC variants of the rack devices (R).
The adhesive feet ship with the 24 VDC variants. The permitted ambient temperature for desktop operation is -40 °C to +50 °C.
Desktop operation (only 24 VDC variants with adhesive feet)
1. Select the required 24 V variant of the rack device (R).
2. Lay out the four adhesive feet in preparation.
Check the rack device (R) you are installing; for example that the two mounting brackets are fitted at the front and that the ventilation grilles are free.
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION: If you install a rack device (R) with components inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the rack device (R) (for example the handles of media modules or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
Turn the rack device (R) over and fit the four adhesive feet on the base.
Fit the connectors for the 24 V power supply.
Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling contact.
Removal
Removing from the rack
1. Turn off the power supply for the SCALANCE XR-300M.
2. Disconnect all cables for data traffic and the connectors for the power supply and the grounding cable.
3. Undo the screws on the mounting bracket and remove the rack device (R) from the 19" cabinet.
If necessary, release the locking mechanisms of components inserted in the rack device (R) (for example handles on the media module or clips on the SFP) to be able to remove the media modules (MM900) or the transceiver
(SFP).
114
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
5.2.5
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
19" rack mounting - X-300EEC product group
The X-300EEC can be installed in a rack singly or as pairs.
● Mounting singly:
To do this, an X-300EEC device is secured to a plate and screwed into the 19" rack.
● Mounting as pairs:
Here, two X-300EEC devices are fastened together with plates before installation in the rack:
– 1 plate as middle section (6 screws)
– 2 plates on the outside (3 screws each)
You will find dimension drawings of the plates in section X-300EEC dimension drawings (Page 294).
Image 5-4 Rack mounting of two IE-Switches X-300EEC fastened together
Figure at top: Rear of the switches
Figure at bottom: View from below
Table 5- 3 Legend for rack mounting of two IE-Switches X-300EEC fastened together
No.
1
2
3
Name
Plate for side
Spring washer
Hexagonal nut
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
115
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
No.
5
7
Name
Side section (the side panel should be under slight tension)
IE Switch X-300EEC
5.2.6
Grounding
19" rack mounting - XR-300M EEC product group
WARNING
Danger of injury by falling objects
If you do not use the supplied mounting brackets for 19"rack installation, it is not possible to install the device correctly.
Use only the supplied mounting brackets.
There are several ways of fixing the mounting brackets depending on the mounting position required.
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Grounding simply via the housing is inadequate.
In this case, connect the functional ground to ensure reliable operation.
With devices with a supply voltage of 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC, you should also connect the protective earth to the grounding bolt.
On the SCALANCE X-300EEC, the grounding bolt is on the bottom of the device.
On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the grounding bolt is on the rear of the housing between the power connectors.
116
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
19" rack mounting
19" rack mounting is possible for all rack devices identified by (XR).
Refer to the technical specifications, Installation options table for each product group. The rack device is installed using two mounting brackets fitted to the front. After fitting the two mounting brackets, the rack device can then be installed in a 19" cabinet.
NOTICE
Do not cover the ventilation grilles
During installation, select a mounting position so that the ventilation grilles are always free to achieve adequate cooling. With normal orientation, the ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the housing.
If you install more than one rack device, make sure that the permitted ambient conditions are met for all devices in the rack.
Minimum clearances
If you install the IE Switch in rack devices without forced ventilation or cooling, minimum clearances must be maintained to neighboring devices or the wall of the enclosure. By keeping to the minimum clearances, there is then an adequate stream of air for heat dissipation during operation. Keep to the following minimum clearances to neighboring devices.
Table 5- 4 Minimum clearances for installation in rack devices
Minimum clearance to devices below the switch
Minimum clearance to devices above the switch
Minimum clearance between two SCALANCE XR-300 EEC at an ambient temperature up to 70 °C without external ventilation
Minimum clearance between two SCALANCE XR-300 EEC at an ambient temperature up to 60 °C without external ventilation
100 mm
100 mm
100 mm
45 mm (1 height unit)
NOTICE
Four-point mounting
If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more detailed information in the section "Mechanical stability in operation".
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
117
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
Normal orientation
Normal orientation of the device
• The LED display is on the left of the front panel of the housing.
•
The Ethernet ports or the slots for the modules are also on the front of the housing. Slots for the modules are fitted with dummy covers.
• The C-PLUG is on the right behind a protective panel secured with screws.
(For more detailed information, refer to the section on the C-
PLUG in the X-300 operating instructions.)
•
The ventilation grilles are on the top, bottom and sides of the housing.
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
•
On the rear of the device, you will find the diagnostics port.
•
The grounding bolt and the connectors for the signaling contact and power supplies are also on the rear of the device.
Note that there are different power supplies (see section
"XR-300M EEC product group (Page 32)").
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
118
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
19" rack mounting with normal orientation
19" rack mounting
1. Select the required rack device and the 19" cabinet.
2. Fix the two mounting brackets with 4 screws each to the sides of the housing. The maximum tightening torque for these screws is 0.5 Nm.
Installation
5.2 Installing a switch
3.
4.
5.
6.
CAUTION: If you install a rack device with components inserted.
The locking mechanisms of components installed in the rack device (for example the handles of media modules or the clips on the SFP) must be closed.
See also installation of modular devices:
- Installing media modules in a slot
- Installing an SFP in an SFP media module.
Insert the rack device in the 19" cabinet and hold the rack device at the required height. Make sure that nothing is obstructing air from entering the ventilation grilles.
Fit the securing screws to the two mounting brackets to secure the rack device in the 19" cabinet.
Connect the grounding bolts. On the SCALANCE X-
300EEC, the PE connector is on the bottom of the device. On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the PE connector is on the rear of the device between the power connectors.
Fit the connectors for the power supply.
Note that the SCALANCE X-300 is available for different power supplies (100 to 240 VAC and 24 VDC variants).
Fit the remaining connectors, for example the signaling contact.
SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
Removal
Removing from the rack
1. Turn off the power supply for the SCALANCE XR-300M.
2.
3.
Disconnect all cables for data traffic and the connectors for the power supply and the grounding cable.
Undo the screws on the mounting bracket and remove the rack device from the 19" cabinet.
If necessary, release the locking mechanisms of components inserted in the rack device (for example handles on the media module or clips on the SFP) to be able to remove the media modules (MM900) or the transceiver (SFP).
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
119
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
5.3.1 Installation and removal of media modules
Connecting media modules and SFP transceivers
WARNING
Install and remove media modules only when the power is off
Media modules may only be inserted in or removed from a SCALANCE device when the power supply to the device has been turned off.
Use only approved media modules
Use only "MM900" media modules in the module slots of SCALANCE devices.
CAUTION
Remember the orientation of media modules.
On modular devices, there are always two module slots arranged opposite each other.
Remember the correct orientation when installing MM900 media modules.
Example:
•
The first MM900 media module is installed in slot 3.
• The second MM900 media module installed in slot 4 must be turned through 180 degrees.
On modular devices for rack mounting, pairs of module slots are located one above the other in which modules can be inserted in a specific order:
Example of a rack device:
•
The first MM900 media module is installed in slot 1.
• The second MM900 media module installed in slot 7 must be turned through 180 degrees.
Other modules are then inserted in slots 2 and 8 or 3 and 9 etc.
The permitted operating temperature is decided by the fully equipped device (switch + media module + SFP transceiver).
With modular devices, it is not only the switch that decides the permitted operating temperature of the overall device but also the temperature ranges of the MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers. You will find details in the technical specifications of the relevant components.
The following aspects can restrict the maximum permitted operating temperature:
• The orientation of the carrier device.
•
The use of SFP transceivers.
• The use of transceivers of the types LH, LH+ or ELH.
120
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
NOTICE
Failure of the data traffic due to contamination of optical plug-in connections
Optical sockets and plugs are sensitive to contamination of the end face. Contamination can lead to the failure of the optical transmission network.
Close unused optical sockets and plugs as well as pluggable transceivers and slots with the supplied protective caps.
Remove the protective caps only immediately before you use the plug-in connection.
NOTICE
Use only approved SFPs
If you use components not approved by Siemens AG, in particular SFPs, Siemens cannot accept any responsibility for the correct functioning of the "Ethernet switch system" according to the specification.
Moreover, if components are used that have not been Siemens approved, Siemens cannot vouch for their compatibility or for risk-free use of these components.
Note
Use media modules only in an approved modular device
Use an MM900 media module only for a device equipped with suitable slots for such modules. Example: X308-2M.
The names and labeling of the media modules differ
•
Example: The device is called, for example, MM992-2SFP" [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0], the labeling on the device is “9922AS”. You will find detailed information on the labeling of the media modules in the "MM900 media modules" compact operating instructions.
Note
SFP transceivers with the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC
In contrast to the information in the product documentation for the SCALANCE MM900,
MM992-2SFP media modules can be operated in the SCALANCE XR324-4M EEC at ambient temperatures up to a maximum of 70 °C if the following requirements are met:
•
MM992-2SFP media modules as of hardware product version 02 are suitable. The hardware product version can be found on the device. You can also read out this information with the WBM or the CLI.
•
Only the following SFP transceivers may be used:
– SFP991-1
– SFP991-1LD
– SFP992-1
– SFP992-1LD
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
121
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
Note
Slot number
With modular devices, the MM900 media modules must be given a slot number.
The slot number labels are supplied with the modular devices.
1.
Installing a media module
The media module is inserted with the handle pulled out. When the handle is inserted, the media module is locked in the device.
Note
The figures in the following installation instructions show the installation of a media module in a rack device. The procedure for installation is identical for rack or compact devices.
Select the required slot on the device (for example,
X308-2M). Remove the dummy cover.
2. Pull out the handle on the selected media module.
122
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
3. Place the media module in the guide rails of the device slot.
The media module is correctly installed when it clips easily into the device.
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
4. Push the handle back into the media module. This locks the media module in the device.
5. Insert the connectors.
Removing a media module
CAUTION
Risk of burns due to the high temperature of the module housing
Before removing an MM900 media module, turn the switch off and allow the device to cool down first.
1. Remove all connectors from the media module.
2. Pull out the handle of the media module and remove the media module from the device slot.
3. Secure the dummy cover.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
123
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
5.3.2 SFP installation in SFP media module
NOTICE
Use only approved SFPs
If you use SFPs that are not approved by Siemens AG, there is no guarantee that the device will function according to the specification.
If you use unapproved SFPs, this can lead to the following problems:
• Damage to the device
•
Loss of the approvals
• Violation of the EMC regulations
Use only approved SFPs.
You can insert or remove the SFP during ongoing operation.
Inserting an SFP
Note
Only the media module MM992-2SFP may be fitted with approved SFPs. The SFP media module can be fitted with up to two SFPs.
Device:
Media module
MM992-2SFP
(SFP media module)
Variant [Order number]
Labeling on the device
2 x 100/1000 Mbps [6GK5 992-2AS00-8AA0]
9922AS
Figure
124
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
1. Select the required SFP media module in the slot of the device. (Example: X-308-2M, slot 2)
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
2. Insert the SFP with the clip closed in the SFP media module.
Notice: Closing the clip after insertion does not lock the device in the rack.
3. The SFP can be heard to lock in place and is therefore firmly secured.
4. Plug the connecting cable into the SFP.
The connecting cable can be heard to lock in place and is then firmly secured.
Removing an SFP
1. Remove the cable connected to the SFP.
2. Open the clip on the SFP and remove the SFP from the SFP media module.
Notice: It must be possible to remove the SFP easy without using force.
3. Fit a blind plug to the SFP.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
125
Installation
5.3 Inserting media modules and SFP transceivers
126
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6
WARNING
Before connecting up and commissioning the device, read the information in the section
NOTICE
Failure of the data traffic due to contamination of optical plug-in connections
Optical sockets and plugs are sensitive to contamination of the end face. Contamination can lead to the failure of the optical transmission network.
Close unused optical sockets and plugs as well as pluggable transceivers and slots with the supplied protective caps.
Remove the protective caps only immediately before you use the plug-in connection.
Note
Commissioning devices with redundancy mechanisms
If you use redundancy mechanisms ("HRP" media redundancy or "MRP" and/or redundant coupling of rings over standby coupling), open the redundant path before you insert a new or replacement device in an operational network. A bad configuration or attachment of the
Ethernet cables to incorrectly configured ports causes overload in the network and a breakdown in communication.
A device may only be inserted in a network and connected in the following situations:
•
HRP/MRP:
The ring ports of the device being inserted in the ring were configured as ring ports. The required redundancy mode must also be enabled (see "Configuration Manual
SCALANCE X-300 / X-400", section "X-300 Ring Configuration"). If the device is intended to operate as the redundancy manager, "Redundancy manager enabled" must also be set.
•
Standby coupling:
"Standby connection" must be "enabled" and the "Standby connection name" must match the name of the partner device. You will also need to configure the port with "Enable
Standby Port Monitoring" (see "Configuration Manual SCALANCE X-300 / X-400", section
"X-300/X-400 Standby Mask").
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
127
Connecting
6.1 Wiring rules (SCALANCE X-300, X-300M, X-300M PoE)
6.1 Wiring rules (SCALANCE X-300, X-300M, X-300M PoE)
When wiring use cables with the following AWG categories or cross sections.
Wiring rules for ... connectable cable cross sections for flexible cables
... without wire end ferrule with wire end ferrule with plastic ferrule** with wire end ferrule without plastic ferrule** with TWIN wire end ferrule**
Stripped length of the cable
Wire end ferrule according to DIN 46228 with plastic ferrule**
* AWG: American Wire Gauge
** See note "Wire end ferrules"
Screw-type terminals/Springloaded terminals
0.2 - 2.5 mm
2
AWG: 24 - 13
0.25 - 2.5 mm
2
AWG: 24 - 13
0.25 - 2.5 mm
2
AWG: 24 - 13
0.5 - 1 mm 2
AWG: 20 - 17
8 - 10 mm
8 - 10 mm
Note
Wire end ferrules
Use crimp shapes with smooth surfaces, such as provided by square and trapeze shaped crimp cross sections.
Crimp shapes with wave-shaped profile are unsuitable.
6.2 Connecting the switch
Procedure for connecting the device
Follow the steps below to connect the device:
1. Turn off the power supply.
2. Connect the grounding of the switch according to the following description.
3. Connect the signaling contact of the switch according to the following description.
4. Connect the power supply of the switch according to the following description.
5. Connect the network nodes / subnets to the switch.
6. Turn on the power supply for the switch.
128
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6.3 Connecting media modules/SFPs
6.3 Connecting media modules/SFPs
Power supply of the MM900 media modules
The MM900 media modules are supplied with power by the switch.
Power supply of the SFP transceivers
The SFP transceivers are supplied with power via the SFP media module.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
129
Connecting
6.4 Connecting the grounding
6.4 Connecting the grounding
6.4.1 Connecting the functional ground (XR-300M EEC)
Installation on a DIN rail
The device is grounded over the DIN rail.
S7 standard rail
The device is grounded over its rear panel and the neck of the screw.
Wall mounting
The device is grounded by the securing screw in the unpainted hole.
Please note that IE Switches X-300 must be grounded over one securing screw with minimum resistance.
If an IE Switch X-300 is mounted on a non-conducting base, a grounding cable must be installed. The grounding cable is not supplied with the device. Connect the paint-free surface of the IE Switch X-300 to the nearest grounding point using the grounding cable.
19" rack mounting
● 24 VDC variant:
Grounding is via the mounting bracket on the device or alternatively/additionally via the screw-on bolts on the rear of the device.
● 100 to 240 VAC variant:
Grounding is via the mounting bracket on the device or alternatively/additionally via the screw-on bolts on the rear of the device.
6.4.2 Grounding of the X-300EEC
Functional ground
With the devices X-300EEC and XR-300M EEC with a 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC power supply, functional ground must be connected to the grounding bolts or the power supply terminal of every power supply unit. With the devices X-300EEC and XR-300M EEC with 24 to 48 VDC, functional ground must be connected to the grounding bolts or the mounting brackets (XR-300M EEC). On the X-300EEC, the functional ground is on the bottom of the device, on the XR-300M-EEC on the side.
To wire up the functional ground, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².
130
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6.4 Connecting the grounding
Protective ground
When the device is operated with multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC, the protective ground is connected in addition to the functional ground.
CAUTION
Danger from line voltage
Grounding simply via the housing is inadequate.
In this case, connect the functional ground to ensure reliable operation.
With devices with a supply voltage of 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC, you should also connect the protective earth to the grounding bolt.
On the SCALANCE X-300EEC, the grounding bolt is on the bottom of the device.
On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the grounding bolt is on the rear of the housing between the power connectors.
To wire up the protective ground, use a copper cable of category 14-8 AWG or cable with a cross-section of 1.5 to 6 mm².
Grounding bolts on the underside of the housing of the X-300EEC or on the rear of the XR-
300M-EEC
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
131
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5 Power supply
6.5.1 24 VDC power supply
6.5.1.1 24 VDC safety extra low voltage
24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
WARNING
Operation only with safety-extra low voltage
•
The IE Switch X-300 is designed for operation with safety extra-low voltage (SELV).
This means that only safety extra-low voltages (SELV) complying with
IEC950/EN60950/ VDE0805 can be connected to the power supply terminals.
• The power supply unit for the IE Switch X-300 power supply must meet NEC Class 2, as described by the National Electrical Code(r) (ANSI/NFPA 70).
•
The power of all connected power supply units must total the equivalent of a power source with limited power (LPS limited power source).
• If the device is connected to a redundant power supply (two separate power supplies), both power supplies must meet these requirements.
•
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of
100 mA (safety extra-low voltage (SELV), 24 VDC).
• Never operate the device with AC voltage or DC voltage higher than 32 V DC.
CAUTION
Overvoltage protection for the power supply cables
If IE Switches X-300 are supplied over long 24 V power supply lines or networks, measures are necessary to prevent interference by strong electromagnetic pulses on the supply lines.
These can result, for example, due to lightning or switching of large inductive loads.
One of the tests used to attest the immunity of devices of the IE Switches X-300 to electromagnetic interference was the "surge immunity test" according to EN61000-4-5. This test requires overvoltage protection for the power supply lines (doe not apply to the
X-300EEC). A suitable device is, for example, the Dehn Blitzductor BVT AVD 24 article no.
918 422 or a comparable protective element.
Manufacturer: DEHN+SÖHNE GmbH+Co.KG, Hans Dehn Str. 1, Postfach 1640, D - 92306
Neumarkt, Germany.
Note
Device variants
There are devices with one power supply unit or with two power supply units. Depending on the variant, the data cable outlet can be on the front or at the rear of the device.
132
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
Connecting 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
● The power supply is connected using a 4-pin plug-in terminal block.
● The power supply can be connected redundantly. Both inputs are isolated. There is no distribution of load. When a redundant power supply is used, the power supply unit with the higher output voltage supplies the IE Switch X-300 alone.
● The power supply is connected over a high resistance with the enclosure to allow an ungrounded set up. The two power inputs are non-floating.
Terminal block assignment (4-pin)
Table 6- 1 Pinout of the 24 V safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
Pin number
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Assignment
L1+ 24 V DC
M1
M2
L2+ 24 V DC
Labeling (example)
6.5.1.2 24 VDC - product group X-300
Table 6- 2 24 to 48 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version
(power supply)
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
133
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5.1.3
6.5.1.4
6.5.1.5
Device
X320-1 FE
X320-3LD FE
Device version
(power supply)
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
12 / 24 VDC - product group X-300M
Table 6- 3 24 to 48 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version
(power supply)
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 12 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
24 VDC - product group XR-300M
Table 6- 4 24 to 48 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version (power supply)
XR324-12M 2 x 24 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
24 VDC - product group X-300EEC
Table 6- 5 24 to 48 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version
(power supply)
X302-7EEC
X307-2EEC
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
●
●
134
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5.1.6
6.5.1.7
Table 6- 6 24 to 48 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version
(power supply)
XR324-4M EEC 1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
24 VDC - product group X-300M PoE
Table 6- 7 24 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device Device version
(power supply)
X308-2M PoE 1 x 24 VDC
24 V safety extra-low voltage
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
24 VDC - XR-300M PoE product group
Table 6- 8 24 VDC safety extra-low voltage overview
Device
XR324-4M PoE
Device version (power supply) 24 V safety extra-low voltage
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 24 VDC
(SELV) can be connected redundantly
●
●
6.5.1.8 Connector for redundant power supply
Device variants with 1 or 2 power supply units
There are devices variants with one power supply unit or with two power supply units. With device variants with two power supply units, the 2nd power supply unit is also known as the redundant power supply unit.
The connection is made using a 4-terminal plug-in terminal block to which two power supply units can be connected (connected redundantly).
If two power supply units are connected, this is known as a redundant power supply.
Connect two power supplies as described below to achieve a correlation between the pin assignment and LED display.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
135
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
Connecting a redundant power supply to 1 power supply unit
Use the terminal block "X1" to connect the power supply.
Image 6-1 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with one power supply unit
Image 6-2 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with two power supply units
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1, this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L2/M2, this is indicated by LED L2.
Connecting a redundant power supply to 2 power supply units
To connect the power supplies, use pins L1/M1 of the left terminal block "X1" and pins L1/M1 of the right terminal block "X2". Only "L1" is monitored on each terminal block.
Since both power supply units have connectors for redundant power supply, you can connect 2 power supplies to each of the two power supply units. This should, however, only be necessary in extremely rare situations.
136
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
Image 6-3 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with two power supply units
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1 of terminal block "X1", this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1 of terminal block "X2", this is indicated by LED L2.
6.5.1.9 Connecting a redundant power supply to the XR300-EEC
Device variants with 1 or 2 power supply units
There are devices variants with one power supply unit or with two power supply units. With device variants with two power supply units, the 2nd power supply unit is also known as the redundant power supply unit.
The connection is made using a 4-terminal plug-in terminal block to which two power supply units can be connected (connected redundantly).
If two power supply units are connected, this is known as a redundant power supply.
Connect two power supplies as described below to achieve a correlation between the pin assignment and LED display.
Connecting a redundant power supply to 1 power supply unit
Use "PS1" to connect the power supply of the terminal block.
Image 6-4 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with one power supply unit
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
137
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
138
Image 6-5 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with two power supply units
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1, this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L2/M2, this is indicated by LED L2.
Connecting a redundant power supply to 2 power supply units
To connect the power supplies, use pins L1/M1 of the left terminal block "PS1" and pins
L2/M2 of the right terminal block "PS2".
Image 6-6 Assignment of the LED display to the pins for redundant power supply with devices with two power supply units.
● If the power supply fails at pins L1/M1, this is indicated by LED L1.
● If the power supply fails at pins L2/M2, this is indicated by LED L2.
It would also be possible to use the L1/M1 pins of the right terminal block. In this case, however, identification of the terminal block involved from the LED display is not immediately obvious.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
6.5.2
6.5.2.1
6.5.2.2
100 ... 240 V - product group XR-300M
Table 6- 9 100 to 240 VAC power supply overview
Device Device version (power supply)
XR324-12M 1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
100 to 240 VAC power supply
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
The supply voltage for the devices listed is 100 to 240 VAC.
This device can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist.
Connect or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off!
WARNING
Devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply do not have an ATEX approval.
Devices with a 100 to 240 V AC power supply are not approved for use in hazardous areas according to EC-RL-94/9 (ATEX).
NOTICE
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where necessary, with cable ties.
100 ... 240 V power supply
Redundant
-
Single
●
100 to 240 VAC - product group X-300EEC
Table 6- 10 100 to 240 VAC power supply overview
Device Device version (power supply)
X302-7EEC 1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
100 ... 240 V power supply
Redundant
-
●
Single
●
-
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
139
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5.2.3
6.5.2.4
Device
X307-2EEC
Device version (power supply)
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
100 to 240 VAC - XR-300M EEC product group
Table 6- 11 100 to 240 VAC power supply overview
Device Device version (power supply)
XR324-4M EEC 1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
100 ... 240 V power supply
Redundant
-
●
Single
●
-
100 ... 240 V power supply
Redundant
-
●
Single
●
-
100 to 240 VAC XR-300M PoE product group
Table 6- 12 100 to 240 VAC power supply overview
Device Device version (power supply)
XR324-4M PoE 1 x 100 to 240 VAC
100 ... 240 V power supply
Redundant
-
Single
●
NOTICE
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where necessary, with cable ties.
6.5.2.5 Fitting the connector for 100 to 240 V AC
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
If used with cables with more than two wires, correct functioning of the connector casing cannot be guaranteed because the two halves of the connector casing can come apart. If this occurs, you will also not be able to connect all the wires in the connector. Open wire ends may be dangerous due to line voltage.
Use only two-wire cables.
140
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Procedure
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
Follow the steps below to fit the connector to a two-wire cable:
1. Connect the cable to the terminal block. Strip the cable jacket only as far as necessary to be able to strip the insulation and connect up the wires.
2. Feed the supplied cable tie through the two openings in the lower part of the housing as shown in the figure.
3. Insert the terminal block with the connected cable in the lower part of the housing and tighten the cable tie. The cable must be securely held in the lower part of the housing by the cable tie. Cut off the excess cable tie.
4. Fit the upper part of the housing. The housing is correctly mounted when the two catches audibly click into place and are flush with the surface of the housing.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
141
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5.2.6 Connecting the 100 to 240 VAC power supply
Connecting the 100 to 240 VAC power supply via the 2-pin terminal block
There are devices with single (1 x 100 to 240 V) or redundant power supply (2 x 100 to 240
V). The cable outlet can be to the front or rear depending on the device type.
● The power supply is connected using a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
● The two power inputs are always non-floating.
Terminal block assignment (2-pin)
Table 6- 13 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC power supply
Assignment Labeling Pin number
Pin 1
Pin 2
L1 (100 to 240 VAC)
N
6.5.2.7 Connecting the power supply 100 to 240 VAC to X-300EEC / XR-300M EEC
Power supply 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
The switch is available in the following versions for power supply with the multirange power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
● With single power supply unit (1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC)
● With redundant power supply unit (2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC)
Each power supply unit PS1 and PS2 has a separate supply connector.
You can recognize the type of power supply from the labeling on the device and the labeling of the terminal block for the power supply of the switch.
On devices with a 100 to 240 VAC power supply, the connectors of the signaling contact and the power supply are identical. To avoid confusion, the two pins have a different coding.
142
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Grounding
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Grounding simply via the housing is inadequate.
In this case, connect the functional ground to ensure reliable operation.
With devices with a supply voltage of 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC, you should also connect the protective earth to the grounding bolt.
On the SCALANCE X-300EEC, the grounding bolt is on the bottom of the device.
On the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC, the grounding bolt is on the rear of the housing between the power connectors.
Connecting to the power supply
The connection is made via one (or two) 3-pin connector(s) on the terminal block for the power supply.
NOTICE
Damage to the device due to incorrectly wiring the terminal blocks
With devices with a supply voltage of 100 to 240 VAC and 60 to 250 VDC, the terminal blocks for the power supply and signaling contact are plugged in and screwed down in the device. Both terminal blocks have three pins but coding prevents the two terminal blocks being confused.
Make sure that the cables of the power supply and the cables for the signaling contact are connected to the correct terminal block.
Table 6- 14 Pin assignment at terminal block 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC for the power supply
Pin number
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Assignment
L (100 to 240 V)
N
FE (functional earth)
To wire up the power connector, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².
DC voltage is connected at the following terminals:
● Plus to "L"
● M to "N"
Secure the firm seat of connectors and the terminal block by tightening the screws (does not apply to X-300EEC).
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
143
Connecting
6.5 Power supply
6.5.2.8 Connecting the 100 to 240 V AC power supply with the XR-300M PoE
Connecting to the power supply
The devices have a single power supply (1 x 100 to 240 V).
The power supply is connected using a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
Terminal block assignment (2-pin)
Table 6- 15 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC power supply
Assignment Labeling
To wire up the power connector, use a copper cable of category 18-12 AWG or cable with a cross-section of 0.75 to 2.5 mm².
144
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
6.6
6.6.1
Connecting
6.6 Signaling contact
Signaling contact
24 VDC signaling contact
The signaling contact is connected to a 2-pin plug-in terminal block.
The signaling contact can be subjected to a maximum load of 100 mA (safety extra low voltage SELV 12 VDC / 24 VDC).
Table 6- 16 Pin assignment of the signaling contact
Pin number Assignment (example)
Pin 1
Pin 2
F1
F2
NOTICE
Laying the connecting cables of the signaling contact with the X-300EEC
To improve the EMC properties (surge protection), the two connecting cables of the signaling contact should be laid together.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
145
Connecting
6.6 Signaling contact
6.6.2 Signaling contact 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC (X-300EEC)
WARNING
Danger from line voltage
Devices with this mark have a 100 to 240 VAC power supply.
This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended.
Connecting and disconnecting may only be performed by an electrical specialist.
Connect or disconnect power supply cables only when the power is turned off.
Signaling contact 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
The signaling contact is connected to a 3-pin plug-in terminal block.
Table 6- 17 Pin assignment of the 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC signaling contact
Pin number Assignment
F1
F2
F3
NC contact
Root
NO contact
To wire up the signaling contact, use a copper cable of category 18-8 AWG or cable with a cross-section of 0.75 to 6 mm².
NOTICE
Securing cables with dangerous voltage
Make sure that the connector cannot be released accidentally by pulling on the connecting cable. Lay the cables in cable ducts or cable channels and secure the cables, where necessary, with cable ties.
146
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Configuration, displays and display elements
7
7.1 Assignment of slot numbers
CAUTION
Specifying the slot number
Slots should be numbered in ascending order.
Insert a label with the slot number in the slot on the housing starting, for example, with the fixed ports and continuing with the modular ports (with MM900 media modules fitted).
Include blind covers and unused slots in the numbering.
Applying the slot numbers
1. Place the required slot number in front of the module.
2. Place the tongue in the opening on the module.
3. Press the slot number into the recess on the front of the housing with your finger. The slot number breaks out of the wheel.
Image 7-1 Slot number plate
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
147
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.2 Show Location
7.2 Show Location
Localizing an IE Switches X-300
To identify an IE Switch X-300 locally and with certainty, you can use the "show location" function on a programming device to select the node over the network and make it flash.
This can be used, for example, when assigning addresses to make sure that the correct node receives the address. All port LEDs of the addressed node flash green twice a second.
With the PST Tool V3.0 or higher, you can trigger this function with "Module \ Flash".
7.3
Description
XR-300 diagnostics port
Rack devices have a diagnostics port on the rear of the housing. This port is designed for an
RJ-11 plug. A suitable connecting cable with an RJ-11 plug and a 9-pin D sub female connector for connection to the serial port of the PC ships with the SCALANCE XR-300.
Diagnostics port on the rear of the device
148
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.4 The SET / SELECT button
Pin assignment
The following table shows the pin assignment of the RJ-11 plug and the D sub female connector:
7.4
Image 7-2 RJ-11 jack (schematic)
RJ-11 plug
5
6
3
4
Pin
1
2
Assignment n. c. n. c.
TD (Transmit Data)
SG (Signal Ground)
RD (Receive Data) n. c.
D-sub 9-pin, female
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
Pin
1
2
Assignment n. c.
RD (Receive Data)
TD (Transmit Data) n. c.
SG (Signal Ground) n. c. n. c. n. c. n. c.
The SET / SELECT button
The SET/SELECT button is located on the top of the housing of devices of the X-300 EEC series. On all other devices, this button is on the front panel of the housing beside the LED display. The SET/SELECT button has several functions that are described below.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
149
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.4 The SET / SELECT button
Change the display mode
By pressing the button briefly, you change to the display mode of the LED display. For more detailed information on this topic, refer to the section "LED display".
Resetting the device to the factory defaults
If you reset, all the changes you have made will be overwritten by factory defaults. Follow the steps outlined below:
1. Turn on display mode A. Display mode A is active when the "DM" LED is not lit. If this
LED is lit or flashing, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly several times) until the "DM" LED goes off. If the SELECT/SET button is not pressed for longer than a minute, the device also turns on display mode A.
2. Hold down the SELECT/SET button for 12 seconds. If you release the button before the
12 seconds have elapsed, the reset is canceled.
Definition of the fault mask
Using the fault mask, you specify an individual "good status" for the connected ports and the power supply. Deviations from this status are then displayed as errors/faults.
1. Turn on display mode A or D. Display mode A is active when the "DM" LED is not lit.
Display mode D is active when the "DM" LED flashes yellow/orange. If a different display mode is active, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly several times) until the required display mode is active.
2. Hold down the SET/SELECT button for five seconds. After three seconds, the "DM" LED begins to flash. If you release the button before the five seconds have elapsed, the previous fault mask will be retained.
Enable/disable the redundancy manager
1. Turn on display mode B. Display mode B is active when the "DM" LED is lit green. If a different display mode is active, you will need to press the SET/SELECT briefly (possibly several times) until display mode B is active.
2. Hold down the SET/SELECT button for five seconds. After three seconds, the "DM" LED begins to flash. If you release the button before the five seconds have elapsed, the action is aborted.
3. The result of the action depends on the initial situation:
– If the redundancy manager and media redundancy were disabled, media redundancy is also enabled after enabling the redundancy manager.
– If you disable the redundancy manager, media redundancy remains enabled.
150
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display
7.5 LED display
The "RM" LED for the "redundancy manager" function
The "RM" LED indicates whether or not the device is operating in the role of redundancy manager and whether or not the ring is operating error-free.
LED color
- green green
LED status off on flashes
Meaning
The device is not operating in the role of "redundancy manager".
The device is operating in the role of redundancy manager. The ring is working without problems, monitoring is activated.
The device is operating in the role of redundancy manager. An interruption has been detected on the ring and the device has switched through.
The "SB" LED for the standby function
This LED shows the status of the standby function.
LED color
- green green
LED status off on flashes
Meaning
The standby function is disabled.
The standby function is enabled. The standby section is passive.
The standby function is enabled. The standby section is active.
The "F" LED for the fault status
The "F" LED (fault) provides information on the error/fault status of the device. While the device is starting up, this LED has the following meaning:
LED color
- red red
LED status off on flashes
Meaning during the device startup
Device startup completed successfully.
Device startup not yet completed or a fault/error has occurred.
Bad firmware image.
During normal operation, the "F" LED provides the following information:
LED color
- red
LED status off on
Meaning during operation
No operating problems.
The device has detected an error. The signaling contact opens.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
151
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display
The "DM" LED for the display mode
The "DM" LED (Display Mode) indicates which of the four display modes A, B, C or D is currently active. The meaning of the L1, L2 and P1, P2, ... LEDs depends on the display mode.
LED color
- green orange yellow/orange
LED status off on on flashes
Meaning
Display mode A
Display mode B
Display mode C
Display mode D
Selecting the display mode
Press the SELECT/SET button to set the required display mode. If the SELECT/SET button is not pressed for longer than a minute, the device automatically changes to display mode A.
Status of the "DM" LED Display mode Pressing the SELECT/SET button starting at display mode A
-
Press once
Press twice
Press 3 times off lit green lit orange flashes yellow/orange
Display mode A (default mode)
Display mode B
Display mode C
Display mode D
The "L1" and "L2" or "L" LEDs for the power supply
Whereas on other devices, the "L1" and "L2" LEDs indicate information about the power, on the SCALANCE X306-1LD FE, this is done by the "L" LED. A redundant power supply for this device can be recognized by the color of the LED.
Meaning in display mode A, B or C
LED
L1 / L2
L
Color
_ green
- orange
Status off on off on
Meaning
Power supply L1 / L2 lower than 17 V *
)
Power supply L1 / L2 higher than 17 V * )
Power supplies L1 and L2 less than 17 V or not connected.
Power supply L1 or L2 higher than 17 V
(no redundant supply). green on Power supplies L1 and L2 higher than 17 V
(redundant supply).
*
)
) The following applies to the X-300EEC:
• For devices with power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC: Limit voltage = 17 VDC
•
For devices with a multiple range power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
Limit voltage = 46.5 VDC or 80 VAC
152
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display
Meaning in display mode D
LED
L1 / L2
L
Color
_ green
- orange
Status off on off on
Meaning
Power supply L1 / L2 is not monitored. If L1 / L2 falls below
17 V *
)
, the signaling contact does not respond.
Power supply L1 / L2 is monitored. If L1 / L2 falls below 17
V *
)
, the signaling contact responds.
Power supplies L1 and L2 are not monitored. If L1 or L2 falls below 17 V, the signaling contact does not respond.
Power supply L1 or L2 is monitored. If L1 or L2 falls below
17 V, the signaling contact responds. green on Power supplies L1 and L2 are monitored. If L1 and L2 fall below 17 V, the signaling contact responds.
*
)
) The following applies to the X-300EEC:
• For devices with power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC: Limit voltage = 17 VDC
•
For devices with a multiple range power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC:
Limit voltage = 46.5 VDC or 80 VAC
Note
Devices of the X-300EEC product group
When using only one power supply unit 24 VDC and two 24 VDC power supplies, the LEDs
"L1" and "L2" signal the existence of the power supply L1 and L2.
When using two 24 VDC power supply units, the LEDs "L1" and "L2" signal the existence of the primary voltage and the secondary voltage for both power supply units. If the power supply is intact, a fault occurring on a power supply unit on the secondary side can be recognized.
The P1, P2, ... LEDs for the port status
The P1, P2, ... LEDs show information on the status of their port (transmission speed, mode, port monitoring). The meaning of these LEDs depends on the display mode ("DM" LED).
Meaning in display mode A
LED color
- green
LED status off
Meaning
No valid link to the port (for example station turned off or cable not connected). on Link exists and port in normal status. In this status, the port can receive and send data. flashes once per second Link exists and port in "blocking" status. In this status, the port only sends and receives management data (no user data). flashes 3 times per second flashes 4 times per second
Link exists and port turned off by management. In this status, no data is sent or received via the port.
Port exists and is in the "monitor port" status. In this status, the data traffic of another port is mirrored to this port.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
153
Configuration, displays and display elements
7.5 LED display
LED color yellow
LED status flashes / lit
Meaning
Receiving data at port.
With SCALANCE X-300 devices, both the receipt and the sending of data is indicated for the optical gigabit ports.
Meaning in display mode B
LED color
- green orange
LED status off on on
Meaning
Port operating at 10 Mbps.
Port operating at 100 Mbps.
Port operating at 1000 Mbps.
If there is a problem on the connection and the type of transmission is fixed (autonegotiation off), the desired status, in other words the set transmission speed (1000 Mbps, 100 Mbps, 10
Mbps) continues to be displayed. If there is a problem on the connection and autonegotiation is active, the port LED goes off.
Meaning in display mode C
LED color
- green
LED status off on
Meaning
Port operating in half duplex.
Port operating in full duplex.
Meaning in display mode D
LED color
-
LED status off green on
Meaning
The port is not monitored; in other words, if a link is not established at the port, this does not trigger the signaling contact.
The port is monitored, in other words, if no connection was established at the port (for example no cable inserted), this triggers the signaling contact and an error state results.
154
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8
8.1 Overview of operating temperatures for SCALANCE X-300
Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
The information applies to media modules with product version 2 (PV2):
Type
X-300M Horizontal
Vertical
X-300M
PoE
Horizontal
Vertical
XR-300M Horizontal
XR-300M
PoE
Installation location
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Without media module
Not possible
(fully modular device)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CU
MM991-2
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2LD
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +45 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots
11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Not possible
(fully modular device)
-40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2 modules in slots 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots
11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
155
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Type
XR-300M
EEC
Installation location
Horizontal
Without media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CU
MM991-2
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2LD
-40 °C to +70 °C
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Maximum 2 modules in slots 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
-40 °C to +70 °C
SFP transceivers of this group can only be used in conjunction with media modules
MM992-2CUC and
MM992-2CU.
When using other modules:
-40 °C to +60 °C
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
Maximum 2 modules in slots
11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Vertical -40 °C to +50 °C
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed.
The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
156
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.2.1
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 1 Construction
Device variant Dimensions (W x H x D)
X304-2FE,
X306-1LD FE
X307-3,
X307-3LD,
X308-2,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1FE,
X320-3LD FE
60 × 125 × 123 mm
120 × 125 × 123 mm
180 × 125 × 123 mm
Weight
700 g
1400 g
1650 g
Degree of protection
IP30
IP30
IP30
Table 8- 2 Installation options
Device variant
X304-2FE,
X306-1LD FE
Installation options
•
DIN rail
•
S7-300 standard rail
•
Wall
X307-3,
X307-3LD,
X308-2,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1FE,
X320-3LD FE
•
•
•
DIN rail
S7-300 standard rail
Wall
1)
1)
Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
157
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Table 8- 3 Permitted ambient conditions
Device variant Storage/transport temperature
Operating temperature
X304-2FE,
X306-1LD FE,
X320-1FE,
X320-3LD FE
X307-3,
X308-2
X307-3LD,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
As of hardware product version 1:
-40 °C to +60 °C
For hardware product version 1:
0 °C to +60 °C
As of hardware product version 2:
-10 ℃ to +60 °C
For hardware product version 1:
0 °C to +60 °C
As of hardware product version 2:
-40 ℃ to +60 °C
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude
Max. 55 ℃ as of 2000 m
Max. 50 ℃ as of 3000 m
<= 95% (no condensation)
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. 55 ℃ as of 2000 m
Max. 50 ℃ as of 3000 m
Max. 55 ℃ as of 2000 m
Max. 50 ℃ as of 3000 m
8.2.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 4 Connection for end devices or network components
Device variant Electrical over twisted pair
X304-2FE 4 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
6 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/ full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
1 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
Optical over fiber-optic cable
2 x SC duplex socket (MM)
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
1 x SC duplex socket (SM)
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
3 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseSX)
3 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
2 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseSX)
2 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
158
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Device variant Electrical over twisted pair
X308-2LH 7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
1 x RJ-45 socket with MDI-X pinning
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/ full duplex)
X308-2LH+
X310
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
1 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
3 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
X310FE
X320-1 FE
10 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
20 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
Optical over fiber-optic cable
2 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
2 x SC duplex sockets
(1000 Mbps, full duplex to
1000BaseLX)
-
-
X320-3LD FE 20 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100 Mbps (half / full duplex)
1 x SC duplex socket (MM)
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
1 x SC duplex socket (MM)
2 x SC duplex sockets (SM)
(100 Mbps, full duplex to
100BaseFX)
Table 8- 5 Electrical data: Power supply
Rated voltage
Safety extra-low voltage (SELV)
24 VDC
Voltage range
19.2 VDC - 28.8 VDC
Permitted voltage range including total ripple
18 VDC - 32 VDC
Table 8- 6 Electrical data: Power consumption
Device variant Power loss at 24 VDC
Current consumption at rated voltage 24 VDC
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3,
X307-3LD,
X308-2,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE,
X320-1 FE
X320-3LD FE
6.2 W
4.8 W
9.6 W
12 W
260 mA
200 mA
400 mA
500 mA
Overcurrent protection at input (nonreplaceable fuse)
3 A / 32 V
3 A / 32 V
3 A / 32 V
3 A / 32 V
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
159
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Table 8- 7 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Voltage via signaling contact
Switching capacity (resistive load)
24 VDC max. 100 mA
Table 8- 8 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Power supply
Signaling contact
1 x 4-pin
1 x 2-pin
Table 8- 9 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Device variant Transmitter output (optical) min. [dBm] max. [dBm]
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1 FE
0
-
-
-19
X320-3LD FE -15
1)
-19
2)
1)
Fast Ethernet, long distance interface
-19
-15
-9.5
-9.5
-9.5
-9.5
-6
2)
Fast Ethernet, multimode interface
-14
-8
-4
-3
-4
-3
0
5
-
-
-14
-8
1)
-14
2)
-32
-34
-17
-21
-17
-21
-23
-23
-
-
-32
-34
1)
-32
2)
Receiver input
Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max.
[dBm]
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-
-
-3
-3
1)
-3
2)
Note
Exception in the naming of X320-3LD FE
With the X320-3LD FE IE switch, the key to the name is different. The position -3LD covers a total of 3 connectors (1-2) of which only 2 connectors are LD, refer to the explanation below:
•
Port 21: Multimode
•
Port 22: LD (long distance, single mode)
•
Port 23: LD (long distance, single mode)
160
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.2.3
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Note
2 optical interface transceivers possible (X320-3LD FE)
The device is also equipped with 2 optical interface transceivers.
•
1)
Fast Ethernet, long distance interface
•
2)
Fast Ethernet, multimode interface
As a result, the electrical data in the technical specifications is divided into two parts: transmitter output optical and receiver input.
Cable lengths
Table 8- 10 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 11 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 22
AWG
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4x2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
161
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Table 8- 12 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)
Device variant
X304-2FE,
X320-1 FE
X306-1LD FE
X310FE
X320-3LD FE
Fiber-optic cable type
50/125 µm multimode fiber
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
-
50/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
Permitted cable length
0 to 5 km
0 ... 5 km
0 to 26 km
-
0 to 5 km
0 to 26 km
Attenuation
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
-
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
Table 8- 13 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - gigabit)
Device variant
X307-3,
X308-2
Fiber-optic cable type
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
Permitted cable length
0 to 350 m
0 to 750 m
X307-3LD
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
50/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
0 to 10 km
... 40 km
X308-2LH+
X310
9/125 µm single mode fiber
-
... 70 km
-
Attenuation
≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤2.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤0.4 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss
0.5 dB; 18 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin; minimum cable attenuation 3 dB
≤0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss
0.5 dB; 21 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin; minimum cable attenuation 8 dB
-
162
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.2.4
Technical specifications
8.2 X-300 technical specifications
Other properties
Table 8- 14 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
Table 8- 15 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Table 8- 16 Mean time between failure (MTBF)
Device variant
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X308-2
X307-3LD ,
X308-2LD,
X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+,
X310,
X310FE
X320-1 FE
X320-3LD FE
1)
These values apply at 40 °C.
MTBF
1)
55 years
65 years
40 years
42 years
38 years
45 years
35 years
30 years
Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
163
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 17 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
8.3.1
164
Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 18 Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
Degree of protection
120 × 125 × 124 mm
1400 g
IP20
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 19 Installation options
Installation options
•
DIN rail
1)
•
S7-300 standard rail
•
Wall
1)
Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
Table 8- 20 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +85 ℃
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude 2000 m or above:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
3000 m or above:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
Table 8- 21 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
Media module
Without media module
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +70 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +70 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
1)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Media module MM992-2SFP
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
-40 °C to +70 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
165
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Media module with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH SFP991-
1ELH200
Installation direction
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
1)
MM991-2P - 25 °C to + 40 ℃
1)
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
8.3.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 22 Connection for end devices or network components
Max. number
Electrical (via twisted-pair)
Media module slots
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
8 ports
4 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
Table 8- 23 Electrical data: Power supply
Device version
(power supply)
12 VDC
Redundant power supply unit
No
24 VDC No
Redundant power supply possible
Yes
Yes
Power supply
12 VDC
(10.6 to 32 VDC)
Rated voltage 24 VDC
Voltage range
Permitted voltage range incl. total ripple
19.2 VDC - 28.8
VDC
18 VDC - 32 VDC
166
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.3.3
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 24 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss
Device version
(power supply)
12 VDC
24 VDC
Current consumption
1.4 A
0.7 A
Effective power loss
16.6 W
16.6 W
Table 8- 25 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection
Device version
(power supply)
12 VDC
24 VDC
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
3 A / 32 V
3 A / 32 V
Table 8- 26 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
12 VDC
24 VDC
Voltage via signaling contact
12 VDC / 24 VDC
24 VDC
Switching capacity (resistive load)
Max. 100 mA
Max. 100 mA
Table 8- 27 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
12 VDC
24 VDC
Power supply
1 x 4-pin
1 x 4-pin
Signaling contact
1 x 2-pin
1 x 2-pin
Cable lengths
Table 8- 28 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
167
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Cable type
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 29 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
8.3.4 Other properties
Table 8- 30 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
168
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.3 X-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 31 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
The value in the following table applies to the basic device without media modules.
MTBF > 40 years
1)
1)
This value applies at 40 °C.
In the calculation of the MTBF of a modular switch, the standard parts count applies; in other words, the reciprocals of all component failure rates are added.
The reciprocal of this total id the MTBF of the entire assembly.
Table 8- 32 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
169
170
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
8.4.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 33 Construction
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight
483 × 44 × 305 mm
483 × 44 × 305 mm
5500 g
5900 g
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
Table 8- 34 Installation options
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
Installation options
• 19" rack
1)
•
Desktop operation with adhesive feet
1 x 100 to 240 VAC 19" rack
1)
1)
Note: If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more detailed information in the section "Mechanical load in operation".
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Note
No desktop operation for devices with 100 to 240 VAC power supply
Desktop operation is permitted only for the 24 VDC variants of the rack devices (R). The adhesive feet ship with the 24 VDC variants. In this case, the permitted ambient temperature is -40 °C to +50 °C.
Table 8- 35 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +85 ℃
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude 2000 m or above:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
3000 m or above:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
Table 8- 36 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
Media module
1)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +70 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
Maximum 2 modules in slots 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
2)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
171
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Media module
1)
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH SFP991-
1ELH200
MM991-2P
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
Max. 2 modules in slots 11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
2)
Maximum 6 modules in slots 7 and 12:
The slot above an MM991-2P may be used as follows:
•
Without media module: - 25 °C to + 50 °C
• With media module MM992-2CUC or MM992-
2CU: - 25 °C to + 40 °C
1)
Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the WBM or the CLI.
2)
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
8.4.2
172
Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 37 Connection for end devices or network components
Max. number
Media module slots
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Diagnostics port
24 ports
12 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
RJ-11 jack
Table 8- 38 Electrical data: Power supply
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
Redundant power supply unit
No
1 x 100 to 240 VAC No
Redundant power supply possible
Yes
No
Power supply
Rated voltage
Voltage range
24 VDC
Permitted voltage range incl. total ripple
100 to 240 VAC
(85 to 264 VAC)
19.2 VDC - 28.8
VDC
18.5 VDC - 30.2
VDC
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 39 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Current consumption
1.8 A
0.8 to 0.45 A
Effective power loss
44 W
50 W
Table 8- 40 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
5 A / 125 V
3.15 A / 250 V
Table 8- 41 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Voltage via signaling contact
Switching capacity (resistive load)
24 VDC max. 100 mA
Table 8- 42 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Power supply
2 x 4-pin
1 x 2-pin
Signaling contact
2 x 2-pin
1 x 2-pin
8.4.3 Cable lengths
Table 8- 43 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
173
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 44 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
8.4.4 Block architecture
Block architecture with SCALANCE XR-300 devices
The XR324-12M and XR324-4M handle the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid of three switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3)
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire speed via all blocks.
174
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Image 8-1 Block architecture of the XR324-12M
8.4.5
Image 8-2 Block architecture of the XR324-4M
Other properties
Table 8- 45 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
175
Technical specifications
8.4 XR-300M technical specifications
Table 8- 46 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
The values in the following table apply to the basic device without media modules.
Device version (power supply)
2 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
1)
These values apply at 40 °C.
MTBF
1)
> 26 years
> 22 years
In the calculation of the MTBF of a modular switch, the standard parts count applies; in other words, the reciprocals of all component failure rates are added.
The reciprocal of this total id the MTBF of the entire assembly.
176
Table 8- 47 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.5
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
Technical specifications for X-300EEC
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
8.5.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 48 Construction
Device version Dimensions (W x H x D)
(power supply)
1 24 VDC power supply unit • Without clip:
60 × 125 × 123 mm
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
2 x 24 VDC power supply units
•
Without clip:
60 × 125 × 123 mm
• With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
1 x power supply unit
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
• Without clip:
60 × 125 × 123 mm
•
With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
2 x power supply units
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
• Without clip:
60 × 125 × 123 mm
•
With clip:
216 × 203 × 99 mm
Weight
1800 g
2030 g
1850 g
2120 g
Table 8- 49 Installation options
Installation options
•
DIN rail
•
S7-300 standard rail
1)
•
Wall
2)
•
19" rack
3)
1)
Possible only with adapter (must be provided by installers).
2)
Wall mounting possible with suitable wall support.
3)
With mounting support
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Degree of protection
IP30
IP30
IP30
IP30
177
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
Table 8- 50 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
Operating temperature Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
1)
<= 95% (no condensation)
1)
The IE Switch was type tested for 16 h at +85 °C.
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude
Max. 65 ℃ as of 2000 m
Max. 60 ℃ as of 3000 m
Table 8- 51 Mechanical stability
Strain withstood / category (standard)
Vibration
(IEC 60068-2-6)
Vibration
(IEEE1613 Class V.S.2)
Shock
(IEC 60068-2-27)
Test conditions
Frequency range 10 Hz to 150 Hz:
•
Transit frequency: 58 Hz to 60 Hz
•
Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit frequency: 0.075
•
Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit frequency: 1
•
Number of cycles per axis: 20
Frequency range 5 Hz to 150 Hz:
•
Transit frequency: 8.4 Hz
• Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit frequency: 3.5
•
Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit frequency: 1
• Number of cycles per axis: 10
•
Octaves / min: 1
Frequency range 2 Hz to 100 Hz:
•
Frequency range: 2 Hz to 100 Hz
•
Transit frequency: 13.2 Hz
•
Peak value of the displacement [mm] below the transit frequency:1
•
Peak value of the acceleration [g] above the transit frequency: 0.7
•
Number of cycles per
•
Velocity: <10 mm/s
• Frequency: 1 to 150 Hz
•
Acceleration: 15 g
• Duration of the pulse: 11 ms
•
Number of shocks per direction: 3
178
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
8.5.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 52 Connection for end devices or network components
Device variant
X302-7EEC
(all variants)
X307-2EEC
(all variants)
Electrical over twisted pair
2 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
7 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
•
5 x Fast Ethernet 10/100 Mbps
(half/full duplex)
• 2 x Gigabit Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex)
Optical over fiber-optic cable
7 x LC sockets multimode
(100 Mbps, full duplex)
2 x LC sockets multimode
(100 Mbps, full duplex)
Table 8- 53 Electrical data: Power supply
Device version
(power supply)
1 power supply unit
24 to 48 VDC
2 power supply units
24 to 48 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
Redundant power supply unit
No
Redundant power supply possible
Power supply
(min./max. range)
2 x power supply units
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
1)
Yes
24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC
(80 to 276 VAC)
2)
60 to 250 VDC
(46.25 to 300 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC
(80 to 276 VAC) 2)
60 to 250 VDC
(46.25 to 300 VDC)
1)
With a redundant 24 VDC power supply, "L1" must be connected on both power supply units.
2)
AC 50/60 Hz ±5 %
Table 8- 54 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss
Device variant
X302-7ECC
X307-2ECC
Device version
(power supply)
24 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
24 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
Current consumption
0.8 to 0.4 A
0.4 to 0.3 A (AC)
0.3 to 0.1 A (DC)
0.5 to 0.3 A
0.3 to 0.2 A (AC)
0.3 to 0.1 A (DC)
Effective power loss
17 W
18 to 19 W (AC)
17 to 18 W (DC)
12 W
12 to 13 W (AC)
12 to 13 W (DC)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
179
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
Table 8- 55 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection
Device version
(power supply)
1 power supply unit 24 to 48 VDC
2 power supply units 24 to 48 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply units 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
1 x T4A / 125 V
2 x T4A / 125 V
1 x T4A / 250 V (AC)
1 x T4A / 300 V (DC)
2 x T4A / 250 V (AC)
2 x T4A / 300 V (DC)
Table 8- 56 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
24 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
Voltage via signaling contact
24 VDC
240 VAC
60 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
Switching capacity
(resistive load) max. 0.1 A max. 5 A max. 0.4 A max. 0.22 A max. 0.11 A
Table 8- 57 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
1 power supply unit 24 to 48
VDC
2 power supply units 24 to 48
VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240
VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Power supply
1 x 4-pin male connector
2 x 4-pin male connector
1 x 3-pin male connector
2 x power supply units 100 to
240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 3-pin male connector
1)
For redundant design connect the signaling contacts in parallel.
Signaling contact
1 x 2-pin male connector
2 x 2-pin connector
1)
1 x 3-pin male connector
2 x 3-pin connector
1)
Table 8- 58 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Transmitter output (optical)
1) min. [dBm]
-19 max. [dBm]
-14
1)
Values for glass fiber: 62.5 to 125 μm multimode
Receiver input
1)
Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max. [dBm]
-32 -14
180
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
Table 8- 59 Overvoltage category
General
In the application range of EN 60255-27
Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage category III
8.5.3 Cable lengths
Table 8- 60 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 61 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Table 8- 62 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)
Fiber-optic cable type Permitted cable length
62.5/125 μm
50/125 μm,
0 to 5 km
Attenuation
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss
0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
181
Technical specifications
8.5 Technical specifications for X-300EEC
8.5.4 Other properties
Table 8- 63 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
Table 8- 64 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Table 8- 65 Mean time between failure (MTBF)
Device variant
X302-7EEC
X307-2EEC
Device version
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC
2 x power supply unit 24 VDC
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
1 x power supply unit 24 VDC
2 x 24 VDC power supply unit
1 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
2 x power supply unit 100 to 240 VAC /
60 to 250 VDC
1)
These values apply at 40 °C.
MTBF
1)
27 years
19 years
22 years
15 years
29 years
20 years
24 years
16 years
Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.
182
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
Table 8- 66 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
183
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
8.6.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 67 Construction
Device
XR324-4M
EEC
Device version
(power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
Dimensions (W x H x
D)
Weight
483 × 44 × 305 mm 6500 g
483 × 44 × 305 mm 6800 g
483 × 44 × 305 mm 6600 g
483 × 44 × 305 mm 7000 g
Degree of protection
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
Table 8- 68 Installation options
Device
XR324-4M EEC
Installation options
19" rack 1)
1)
Note: If mechanical load is high, the device should be secured at four points. You will find more detailed information in the section "Mechanical load in operation".
Table 8- 69 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature -40 °C to +85 ℃
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C <= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude 2000 m or above:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
3000 m or above:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
Table 8- 70 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
Media module
1)
Without media module
MM992-2CUC
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +70 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +70 ℃
2)
184
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
Media module
1)
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Installation direction
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +50 ℃
2)
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH SFP991-
1ELH200
MM991-2P
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +70 °C
Pluggable transceivers of this group may only be used in conjunction with media modules MM992-
2CUC, MM992-2CU and MM992-2M12. When using other modules:
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
Max. 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +55 ℃
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
The slot above an MM991-2P may be used as follows:
• Without media module: - 25 °C to + 50 °C
•
With media module MM992-2CUC or MM992-
2CU: - 25 °C to + 40 °C
1)
Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the WBM or the CLI.
2)
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
185
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
8.6.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 71 Connection for end devices or network components
Max. number
Electrical
Media module slots
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Diagnostics port
24 ports
16 x RJ-45 jacks
10/100/1000 Mbps
4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
12 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
RJ-11 jack
Table 8- 72 Electrical data: Power supply
Device version
(power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
Redundant power supply unit
No
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
Yes
No
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
Yes
Redundant power supply possible
Yes
Yes
No
No
Power supply
(min./max. range)
24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
24 to 48 VDC
(19.2 to 57.6 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC
(80 to 276 VAC)
60 to 250 VDC
(48 to 300 VDC)
100 to 240 VAC
(80 to 276 VAC)
60 to 250 VDC
(48 to 300 VDC)
Table 8- 73 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss
Device version
(power supply)
24 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
Current consumption
1.6 to 0.75 A
0.6 to 0.37 A (AC)
0.7 to 0.17 A (DC)
Effective power loss
40 W
42 W (AC)
42 W (DC)
186
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
Table 8- 74 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection
Device version
(power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
1 x T2H / 250 V
2 x T2H / 250 V
1 x T2H / 250 V (AC)
1 x T2H / 300 V (DC)
2 x T2H / 250 V (AC)
2 x T2H / 300 V (DC)
Table 8- 75 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
24 to 48 VDC
100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250
VDC
Voltage via signaling contact
24 VDC
240 VAC
60 VDC
125 VDC
250 VDC
Switching capacity
(resistive load) max. 0.1 A max. 5 A max. 0.4 A max. 0.22 A max. 0.11 A
Table 8- 76 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC
Power supply
1 x 4-pin
2 x 4-pin
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
Signaling contact
1 x 2-pin
2 x 2-pin
1 x 3-pin
2 x 3-pin
Table 8- 77 Overvoltage category
General
In the application range of EN 60255-27
Overvoltage category II
Overvoltage category III
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
187
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
8.6.3 Cable lengths
Table 8- 78 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 79 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
188
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
8.6.4 Block architecture
Block architecture with SCALANCE XR-300 devices
The XR324-12M and XR324-4M handle the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid of three switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3)
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire speed via all blocks.
Image 8-3 Block architecture of the XR324-12M
Image 8-4 Block architecture of the XR324-4M
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
189
Technical specifications
8.6 XR-300M EEC technical specifications
8.6.5 Other properties
Table 8- 80 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
Table 8- 81 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
The values in the following table apply to the basic device without media modules.
Device version (power supply)
1 x 24 to 48 VDC or
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
2 x 24 to 48 VDC or
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to 250 VDC
1)
These values apply at 40 °C.
MTBF
1)
> 15 years
> 15 years
2)
2)
The redundant power supply unit increases the reliability of the system. The MTBF value of the power supply unit is > 20 years.
In the calculation of the MTBF of a modular switch, the standard parts count applies; in other words, the reciprocals of all component failure rates are added.
The reciprocal of this total id the MTBF of the entire assembly.
190
Table 8- 82 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
At 100 Mbps
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
234962
119732
96154
81274
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
At a frame length of
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds
(at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
8.7.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 83 Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
Degree of protection
120 × 125 × 124 mm
1150 g
IP20
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
191
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
Table 8- 84 Installation options
Installation options
•
DIN rail
1)
•
S7-300 standard rail
•
Wall
1)
Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
Table 8- 85 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +85 ℃
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude 2000 m or above:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
3000 m or above:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
Table 8- 86 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
Media module 1)
Without media module
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +45 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +45 ℃
2)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +45 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +45 ℃
192
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
Media module
1)
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH SFP991-
1ELH200
MM991-2P
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +45 ℃
2)
- 25 °C to + 40 ℃
1)
Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the WBM or the CLI.
2) The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
8.7.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 87 Connection for end devices or network components
Max. number
Electrical
Media module slots
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
8 ports
4 x RJ-45 jacks, MDI-X pinning,
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex) power supply for connected devices (PDs) using
Power over Ethernet (PoE) according to
IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1)
2 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
Table 8- 88 Electrical data: Power supply
Rated voltage Voltage range
24 VDC 19.2 VDC - 28.8 VDC
Permitted voltage range including total ripple
18.5 VDC - 30.2 VDC
Table 8- 89 Electrical data: Power consumption and redundancy
Current consumption
Max. power consumption
(incl. PoE power supply of the connected PoE devices (PDs))
Power loss at 24 VDC
2 A
48 W
17 W
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
193
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
194
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
Redundant power supply unit
Redundant power supply possible
Table 8- 90 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Voltage via signaling contact
Switching capacity (resistive load)
3 A / 32 V and
5 A / 125 V (PoE)
No
Yes
24 VDC max. 100 mA
Table 8- 91 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Power supply
Signaling contact
1 x 4-pin male connector
1 x 2-pin male connector
Table 8- 92 Power over Ethernet at port P1, P2, P3, P4
PoE function within a power supply system
Method of PoE power feed
Reserved power per port
Overall power on all 4 ports
According to IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1) for environment A
Alternative A
(refer to the following table for the pin assignment)
15.4 W at port, of which the following can be used by the PD:
12.95 W
Max. 30.8 W
Table 8- 93 Electrical isolation
Between the ports
Between ports and ground
Between ports and 24 VDC power input
No
Yes
Yes
Table 8- 94 Pin assignment of the Ethernet ports of the SCALANCE PoE switch
Pin number / wire
1)
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Assignment for data transmission
RX+
RX-
TX+
Assignment for power transfer
(PoE).
Alternative A (MDI-X)
V-
V-
V+
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.7.3
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
Pin number / wire
1)
Assignment for data transmission
Assignment for power transfer
(PoE).
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
-
-
TX-
Alternative A (MDI-X)
-
-
V+
Pin 7
Pin 8
-
-
-
-
1)
with 4-wire industrial twisted-pair cables, the wires are connected to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6.
Cable lengths
Table 8- 95 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 96 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
195
Technical specifications
8.7 X-300M PoE technical specifications
Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord)
Permitted cable length
Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
8.7.4 Other properties
Table 8- 97 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
Table 8- 98 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
The value in the following table applies to the basic device without media modules.
MTBF > 30 years
1)
1)
This value applies at 40 °C.
In the calculation of the MTBF of a modular switch, the standard parts count applies; in other words, the reciprocals of all component failure rates are added.
The reciprocal of this total id the MTBF of the entire assembly.
196
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Note
The IE Switches X-300 support "full wire speed switching" complying with IEEE 802.3 on all ports. The number of packets therefore depends on the packet length.
Table 8- 99 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that is not assigned to a specific device variant, version or a media module, apply to all device variants/versions of the product group.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
197
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
8.8.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 100 Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
Degree of protection
449 × 43.6 × 305 mm
6800 g
IP20 (with closed service panel)
Table 8- 101 Installation options
Device version
(power supply)
24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Installation options
• 19" rack
•
Desktop operation with adhesive feet
19" rack
Table 8- 102 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +85 ℃
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude 2000 m or above:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
3000 m or above:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
Table 8- 103 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
Media module
1)
Without media module
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Operating temperature
2)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
Vertical
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
198
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Media module
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
1)
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Media module MM992-2SFP with pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
SFP991-1ELH200
MM991-2P
Installation direction
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Operating temperature
2)
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
-40 °C ... +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
-40 °C to +60 ℃
-40 °C to +50 ℃
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
-40 °C ... +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 ℃
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and 4:
The slot above an MM991-2P may be used as follows:
•
Without media module: - 25 °C to + 50 °C
•
With media module MM992-2CUC or MM992-
2CU: - 25 °C to + 40 °C
1)
Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the WBM or the CLI.
2)
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
199
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
8.8.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 104 Connection for end devices or network components
Max. number
Electrical
Media module slots
Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Diagnostics port
24 ports
Port 1 to 8
8 x RJ-45 jacks, MDI-X pinning,
10/100/1000 Mbps (half/full duplex) power supply for connected devices (PDs) using
Power over Ethernet (PoE) according to
IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1)
Port 9 to 16:
8 x RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment
10/100/1000 Mbps (half / full duplex)
4 x modular
(2 ports per slot)
The values correspond to those of the permitted
MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
RJ-11 jack
Table 8- 105 Electrical data: Power supply
Device version
(power supply)
24 VDC
Redundant power supply unit
No
100 to 240 VAC No
Redundant power supply possible
Yes
No
Power supply
Rated voltage
Voltage range
24 VDC
19.2 VDC - 28.8
VDC
Permitted voltage range incl. total ripple
18.5 VDC - 30.2
VDC
100 to 240 VAC
(85 to 264 V)
Table 8- 106 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss
Device version Current consumption
(power supply)
24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
4.2 A
1,3 ... 0.7 A
1)
incl. PoE power supply of the connected PoE devices (PDs)
Effective power loss
46 W
42 W
Max. power consumption
1)
100 W
96 W
200
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Table 8- 107 Electrical data: Overcurrent protection
Device version
(power supply)
24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Overcurrent protection of the power supply
Non-replaceable fuse
T 5 A / 250 V
T 2 A / 500 V
Table 8- 108 Electrical data: Signaling contact
Voltage via signaling contact
Switching capacity (resistive load)
24 VDC max. 100 mA
Table 8- 109 Plug-in terminal block for connectors of the power supply and signaling contact
Device version
(power supply)
24 VDC
100 to 240 VAC
Power supply
1 x 4-pin
1 x 2-pin
Signaling contact
1 x 2-pin
1 x 2-pin
Table 8- 110 Power over Ethernet at port P1 to P8
PoE function within a power supply system
Method of PoE power feed
Reserved power per port
Overall power on all PoE ports
According to IEEE 802.3af / 802.3at (type 1) for environment A
Alternative A
(refer to the following table for the pin assignment)
15.4 W at port, of which the following can be used by the PD:
12.95 W
Max. 53.2 W
Table 8- 111 Electrical isolation
Between ports P1 to P8
Between ports P9 to P16
Between port groups
P1 to P8 and P9 to P16
Between ports and ground
Between ports and 24 VDC / 230 VAC power input
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
201
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Table 8- 112 Pin assignment of the Ethernet ports of the SCALANCE PoE switch
Pin number / wire
1)
Assignment for data transmission
Assignment for power transfer
(PoE).
Pin 1
Pin 2
Pin 3
Pin 4
Pin 5
Pin 6
Pin 7
RX+
RX-
TX+
-
-
TX-
-
Alternative A (MDI-X)
V-
V-
V+
-
-
V+
-
Pin 8 - -
1) with 4-wire industrial twisted-pair cables, the wires are connected to pins 1, 2, 3 and 6.
8.8.3 Cable lengths
Table 8- 113 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
IE FC TP standard cable
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
Table 8- 114 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 24
AWG
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 × 2, 22
AWG
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord) with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4 × 2 with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
202
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
Cable type Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord)
Permitted cable length
Note
Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet or gigabit)
The values correspond to those of the permitted MM900 media modules and SFP transceivers.
8.8.4 Block architecture
Block architecture of the SCALANCE XR-300M PoE
The XR-300M PoE handles the Ethernet frame traffic of the 24 ports with the aid of three switch blocks.
● The three switch blocks are connected in series (block 1 via block 2 to block 3).
● Gigabit wire speed is possible within a block (max. 8 ports per block).
● Between the blocks there is a bandwidth of 1 gigabit/s available,that must be shared by all ports for frame traffic between the blocks.
When operating solely with Fast Ethernet (100 Mbps), the XR devices support full wire speed via all blocks.
Image 8-5 Block architecture of the XR324-4M
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
203
Technical specifications
8.8 XR-300M PoE technical specifications
8.8.5 Other properties
Table 8- 115 Switching properties
Max. number of learnable addresses
Aging time
Switching technique
Latency
8000
30 sec
Store and forward
5 μs
Table 8- 116 Reconfiguration times for redundancy mechanisms
Redundancy mechanism
HRP
Standby link
MRP
Reconfiguration times
300 ms
300 ms
200 ms
Mean time between failure (MTBF)
The value in the following table applies to the basic device without media modules.
MTBF > 15 years
1)
1)
This value applies at 40 °C.
In the calculation of the MTBF of a modular switch, the standard parts count applies; in other words, the reciprocals of all component failure rates are added.
The reciprocal of this total id the MTBF of the entire assembly.
Table 8- 117 Full wire speed switching
At 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of
64 bytes
128 bytes
256 bytes
512 bytes
1024 bytes
1280 bytes
1518 bytes
204
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
At 100 Mbps
Number of frames per second
At 1000 Mbps
At a frame length of
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame delay time. When a frame passes through the switch, this is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the
IE Switch X-300 by the following values:
• at 64 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• at 1500 bytes frame length: Delay of approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means, the more IE Switches X-300 a frame runs through, the higher the frame delay.
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Note
Validity of the technical specifications
All the technical specifications described in this section that are not specific to a product version, apply to the MM900 media module.
8.9.1 Construction, installation and environmental conditions
Table 8- 118 Construction
Dimensions (W x H x D)
Weight
60 × 22 × 100 mm
80 g
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
205
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Table 8- 119 Operating temperature depending on the media modules used
1) 2)
Type
X-300M
X-300M
PoE
Installation location
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
XR-300M Horizontal
XR-300M
PoE
XR-300M
EEC
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Horizontal
Vertical
Without media module
-40 °C to +60 °C
Not possible
(fully modular device)
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
-40 °C to +70 °C
MM991-2LH+
(SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
-40 °C to +70 °C
Not possible
(fully modular device)
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
SFP991-1ELH200
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C -40 °C to +60 °C -40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +45 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots
11 and 12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots 11 and
12:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots
3 and 4:
-40 °C ... +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +60 °C Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and
4:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots
3 and 4:
-40 °C ... +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
-40 °C to +70 °C
SFP transceivers of this group can only be used in conjunction with media modules
MM992-2CUC,
MM992-2CUC (C) and MM992-2CU.
When using other modules:
-40 °C to +60 °C
-40 °C to +50 °C
Maximum 2 modules in slots 3 and
4:
-40 °C to +60 °C
With more than 2 modules or other slot assignment:
-40 °C to +50 °C
206
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Type Installation location
Without media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+
(SC)
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
Media module
MM992-2SFP with SFP transceiver
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-1LH+
SFP992-1ELH
SFP991-1ELH200
1)
Only hardware product version 02 of the media modules is permitted.
The hardware product version is shown on the product. You can also read out this information from the device with the
WBM or the CLI.
2)
The permitted operating temperature depends on how the mounting device was installed. The installation is horizontal if the device labeling is from left to right. With a vertical installation, the device labeling is rotated through 90°.
Table 8- 120 Operating temperature with media module MM991-2P
Type
X-300M
X-300M PoE
XR-300M
XR-300M PoE
XR-300M EEC
Operating temperature
•
- 25 °C to + 40 ℃
The slot above an MM991-2P may be used as follows:
•
Without media module:
- 25 °C to + 50 °C)
•
With media module MM992-2CUC or MM992-2CU:
- 25 °C to + 40 °C)
Note the information under "MM991-2P product characteristics".
Table 8- 121 Permitted ambient conditions
Storage/transport temperature
Max. relative humidity in operation at 25 °C
-40 °C to +85 ℃
<= 95% (no condensation)
Max. ambient temperature at operating altitude As of 2000 m:
-5 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
As of 3000 m:
-10 °C of the max. operating temperature
1)
1)
See table: "Operating temperature depending on the media modules used"
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
207
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
8.9.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 122 Interfaces
Media module
MM992-2CUC
Interfaces
2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
MM992-2CUC (C) 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar, varnished
MM992-2CU 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 port electrical without securing collar
MM992-2M12 (C) 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical
MM992-2VD 2 x 10/100/1000 Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, multimode FO cable, up to max. 5 km
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC port optical, for glass FO cable (multimode) with diagnostics up to max. 5 km
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
2 x 100 Mbps, BFOC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 26 km
2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO cable, up to max. 5 km
MM991-2LD (SC) 2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 26 km
MM991-2LH+ (SC) 2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 70 km
MM991-2P 2 x 100 Mbps SC RJ ports optical for Plastic Optical Fiber (POF) up to max.
50 m or Polymer Cladded Fiber (PCF) up to max. 100 m
MM992-2 2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO cable, up to max. 750 m
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
MM992-2SFP
1)
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode FO cable, up to max. 750 m, varnished
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 10 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 40 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 70 km
2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode FO cable, up to max. 120 km
2 x 100/1000 Mbps, SFP media module, optical LC ports with corresponding
SFP transceivers.
Table 8- 123 Power supply
Power supply (24 VDC SELV)
The media modules are supplied with power by the SCALANCE device. No other power supply is permitted.
208
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Table 8- 124 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss I
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM991-2P
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
Current consumption
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
70 mA
100 mA
100 mA
80 mA
100 mA
80 mA
80 mA
140 mA
70 mA
70 mA
80 mA
90 mA
100 mA
110 mA
Effective power loss
1.65 W
1.65 W
1.65 W
1.65 W
1.65 W
2.42 W
2.42 W
2.04 W
2.42 W
2.04 W
2.04 W
3.36 W
1.76 W
1.76 W
1.95 W
2.11 W
2.42 W
2.75 W
Table 8- 125 Electrical data: Current consumption and power loss II
MM992-2SFP with
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
SFP991-1ELH200
Current consumption
60 mA
60 mA
70 mA
60 mA
70 mA
70 mA
80 mA
100 mA
100 mA
Effective power loss
1.54 W
1.54 W
1.65 W
1.38 W
1.60 W
1.71 W
1.93 W
2.31 W
2.31 W
Note
Fusing and signal contacts with media modules
The MM900 media modules do not have their own fuses and have no signaling contacts.
The fuses and the signaling contacts exist in the SCALANCE device.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
209
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Table 8- 126 Electrical data: Transmitter output (optical) and receiver input
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
2)
MM992-2VD
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM991-2P
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
MM992-2SFP
1)
Transmitter output (optical) min. [dBm] max. [dBm]
-19
-15
-19
-15
-5
-8
-9.5
-9.5
-9.5
-6
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-19
-14
-8
-14
-8
0
-2
-4
-4
-3
0
5
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-14
-32
-34
-34
-32
-34
-23
-17
-17
-21
-23
-23
-30
-
-
-
-
-
-
-32
Receiver input
Sensitivity min. [dBm] Input power max.
[dBm]
-
-
-
-3
-3
-3
-
-3
-3
+1
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-3
-
-
-3
1)
You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver
SFP/SFP+".
2)
The ports of the MM992-2M12 (C) only meet the requirements according to Environment A
(IEEE 802.3), in other words, the electrical isolation of the ports is designed for 500 Vrms (1 minute).
8.9.3
Copper cables
Cable lengths
Table 8- 127 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD (without
VD)
1)
Cable
IE TP torsion cable with
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord
IE TP torsion cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
IE FC TP marine/trailing/flexible cable with IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord
Permitted cable length
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 55 m
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
210
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Media module Cable
IE FC TP marine/trailing/ flexible cable with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
IE FC TP standard cable with
IE FC Outlet RJ-45 + 10 m TP cord
IE FC TP standard cable with IE FC RJ-45 plug 180
MM992-2VD (with VD)
2)
IE FC TP standard cable GP 4X2 (24
AWG) with IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2x2
with IE FC RJ-45 plug 2x2
IE FC TP standard cable GP 2x2
with IE FC RJ-45 plug 2x2
PROFIBUS FC standard cable GP
with IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2
PROFIBUS FC standard cable GP
with IE FC RJ-45 plug 4x2
1)
The VD mode (Variable Distance) is turned off.
2)
The VD mode (Variable Distance) is turned on.
Permitted cable length
0 to 85 m
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
0 to 500 m at 100 Mbps
0 to 300 m at 100 Mbps.
300 to 500 m at 10 Mbps
100 to 1000 m at 10 Mbps
0 to 100 m at 100 Mbps.
Table 8- 128 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD (without
VD)
1) 2)
Cable
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 24 AWG
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 24 AWG with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180,
4x2
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 22 AWG with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 22 AWG with
IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
1)
The VD mode (Variable Distance) is turned off.
Permitted cable length
0 to 90 m
0 to 60 m
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
2)
If the VD mode is turned on, the speed is reduced to 100 Mbps. For permitted cable lengths, see table Fast Ethernet.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
211
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Fiber-optic cables
Table 8- 129 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - Fast Ethernet)
Media module Fiber-optic cable type Max. permitted
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2LD
(SC)
MM991-2LH+
(SC)
MM991-2P
50/125 µm multimode fiber
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
50/125 µm multimode fiber
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
MM991-2 (SC) 50/125 µm multimode fiber
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
980/1000 plastic optical fiber
200/230 polymer cladded fiber cable length
5 km
5 km
5 km
5 km
26 km
5 km
5 km
26 km
70 km
50 m
100 m
Attenuation
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤1 dB/km at 1310 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin
≤0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
26 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable attenuation 3 dB
9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation with 3 dB link power margin
6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation with 3 dB link power margin
Table 8- 130 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Media module
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
Fiber-optic cable type
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
50/125 µm multimode fiber
Max. permitted cable length
350 m
750 m
Attenuation
≤3.1 dB/km at 850 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
≤2.5 dB/km at 850 nm; 1200 MHz×km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at
3 dB link power margin
212
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
Media module Fiber-optic cable type
MM992-2LD 9/125 µm single mode fiber
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
9/125 µm single mode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
MM992-2ELH 9/125 µm single mode fiber
Max. permitted cable length
10 km
40 km
70 km
120 km
Attenuation
≤0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB; 6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin
≤0.4 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
18 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable attenuation 3 dB
≤0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
21 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable attenuation 8 dB
≤0.225 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
27 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin, minimum cable attenuation 8 dB
Copper / fiber-optic cables
Table 8- 131 Permitted cable lengths (copper cable/fiber-optic cable) for the SFP media module
Media module
MM992-2SFP
*)
Max. permitted cable length
Depending on the SFP transceiver used.
*) You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver SFP/SFP+".
Attenuators
Transceivers of the types LH, LH+, ELH and ELH200 are designed for long distances and therefore send more power than they can receive.
If you establish a connection between such transceivers with a short cable length, use attenuators. Attenuators increase the attenuation and therefore protect the receiving diode.
Select the attenuation so that the transmit power (transmitter output) behind the attenuator is lower than the maximum received power (input power):
Transmitter output max. [dBm] - attenuator [dB] < input power max. [dBm]
Recommendation for the attenuation of the attenuator on a connection with the same transceivers:
Transceiver type
LH
LH+
ELH, ELH200
Attenuator
6 dB ... 12 dB
12 dB ... 20 dB
16 dB ... 24 dB
If you have established a connection on a pluggable transceiver with a short cable length, it is possible that the transmitter will be turned off. In this case, pull the transceiver and plug it in again.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
213
Technical specifications
8.9 MM900 technical specifications
GI-PCF
For segment lengths longer than 100 m, you can use GI-PCF cables. Note the information of the manufacturer.
8.9.4 Other properties
Table 8- 132 Mean time between failure (MTBF)
Device version (power supply)
MM992-2CUC,
MM992-2CUC (C),
MM992-2CU,
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM991-2P
MM992-2VD
MM991-2,
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2FM
MM992-2 (C)
MM991-2LD,
MM991-2LD (SC),
MM992-2LD
MM991-2LH+,
MM992-2LH.
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
MM992-2SFP 2)
1)
These values apply at 40 °C
MTBF
1)
> 250 years
> 230 years
> 200 years
> 140 years
> 135 years
> 115 years
> 105 years
> 95 years
> 250 years 3)
2)
You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver SFP/SFP+".
3)
empty
214
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
8.10 SFP technical specifications
8.10.1 Construction, installation and environment
Table 8- 133 Construction
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
(Variant)
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
Dimensions (W x H x D)
[in mm]
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
13.7 x 11.9 x 56.5
Table 8- 134 Installation options (modular)
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
(Variant)
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
Modular installation options:
Media module installation in slot
-
-
-
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
20
20
20
20
20
20
Weight
[in g]
20
20
SFP installation in SFP media module
●
●
●
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP20
IP degree of protection
IP20
IP20
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
215
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
Device:
Transceiver
SFP992-1
(Variant) Modular installation options:
Media module installation in slot SFP installation in SFP media module
SFP992-1LD
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
-
-
●
●
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
-
-
-
●
●
●
*) Note: When used in shipbuilding, installation on a 35 mm DIN rail is not permitted. In ships, the 35 mm DIN rail does not provide adequate support.
Table 8- 135 Permitted ambient conditions
Device: transceiver
(Variant)
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
Operating temperature
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
-40 °C through
+85 °C
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
-40 °C through
+85 °C
-40 °C through
+85 °C
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
-40 °C through
+85 °C
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
-40 °C through
+85 °C
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
-40 °C through
+85 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Relative humidity at 25 °C during operation, maximum
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
Operating altitude at max. xx
°C ambient temperature
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
216
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Device: transceiver
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
(Variant)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
Operating temperature
-40 °C through
+85 °C
-40 °C through
+85 °C
Storage/transport temperature
Relative humidity at 25 °C during operation, maximum
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
-40 °C to +85 °C <= 95%
(no condensation)
Operating altitude at max. xx
°C ambient temperature
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
2000 m at max.
56 °C
3000 m at max.
50 °C
8.10.2 Connectors and electrical data
Table 8- 136 Connection of end devices or network components
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(Variant)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
Connection of end devices or network components
Max. number of which: electrical - optical over FO cable Single mode
2 - 1 x LC port
(100 Mbps)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1 x LC port
(100 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(100 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(1000 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(1000 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(1000 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(1000 Mbps)
1 x LC port
(1000 Mbps)
-
●
●
-
●
●
●
●
Multi mode
●
-
-
-
-
●
-
-
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
217
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
Table 8- 137 Electrical data: Power supply, current consumption and power loss
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
(Variant)
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
*) Note: SFP values in 25 °C environment.
Note
Fusing of transceivers
Effective power loss *)
0.36 W
0.39 W
0.47 W
0.33 W
0.41 W
0.45 W
0.50 W
0.63 W
The SFP transceivers do not have fuses. The fuse is in the modular device (M).
Note
Signaling contact and media modules
The SFP transceivers do not have a signaling contact. The signaling contact is on the modular device (M).
218
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Table 8- 138 Electrical data: Transmitter output optical and receiver input
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(Variant)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
Transmitter output optical min.
[dBm] max.
[dBm]
-19 -14
-15
-5
-9.5
-9.5
-6
0
0
-8
0
-4
-3
0
5
5
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
Receiver input
Sensitivity min.
[dBm]
-32 max. input power
[dBm]
-3
-34
-34
-17
-3
-3
-3
-21
-23
-23
-32
-3
-3
-3
-8
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
219
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
8.10.3 Cable lengths
Table 8- 139 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic) Fast Ethernet
Device: transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
(Variant)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
Fiber FO cable lengths
50/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
0-3km
(1 dB/km at 1310 nm;
1200 MHz*km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
9 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
0 -26km
(0.5 dB/km at 1300 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
14 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin)
*) -70 km
(0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
26 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 3 dB)
Table 8- 140 Permitted cable lengths (fiber-optic) gigabit
Device: transceiver
SFP992-1
(Variant)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
Fiber
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
FO cable lengths
62.5/125 µm multimode fiber
50/125 µm multimode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
9/125 µm single mode fiber
0-350 m
(3.1 dB/km at 850 nm;
1200 MHz*km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
0-750 m
(2.5 dB/km at 850 nm;
1200 MHz*km; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
4.5 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
0 -10 km
(0.5 dB/km at 1310 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB;
6 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 3 dB link power margin)
*) -40 km
(0.4 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
18 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 3 dB)
220
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Device: transceiver
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(Variant) Fiber
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
9/125 µm single mode fiber
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
9/125 µm single mode fiber
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
FO cable lengths
*) -70 km
(0.28 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
21 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 8 dB)
*) -120km
(0.225 dB/km at 1550 nm; maximum insertion loss 0.5 dB,
27 dB max. permitted FO cable attenuation at 2 dB link power margin,
*) minimum cable attenuation 13 dB)
8.10.4 Other properties
Table 8- 141 MTBF
Device: pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
(Variant)
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
1)
These values apply at 40 °C.
MTBF
1)
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
> 120 years
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
221
Technical specifications
8.10 SFP technical specifications
Note
The IE Switches X-300 support full wire speed switching complying with IEEE 802.3 on all ports.
The number of packets depends on the packet length according to the IEEE802.3 standard:
Table 8- 142 Full wire speed switching at 100 Mbps
148810
84459
45290
23496
11973
9615
8127
Number of frames at 1000 Mbps
1488095
844595
452899
234962
119732
96154
81274
At a frame length of (in bytes):
64
128
256
512
1024
1280
1518
Note
The following applies to IE Switches X-300:
The number of IE Switches X-300 connected in a line influences the frame propagation time.
When a frame passes through an IE Switch X-300, it is delayed by the Store&Forward function of the IE Switch X-300
• with a 64 byte frame length by approx. 10 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
• with a 1500 byte frame length by approx. 130 microseconds (at 100 Mbps)
This means that the more IE Switch X-300 devices the frame passes through, the longer the frame delay.
222
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9
9.1 X-300 product group
9.1.1 X-300 approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Requirements
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
223
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this product.
224
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
IECEx
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
225
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
226
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.1.2 X-300 type plate
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group
Image 9-1 X-300 specimen type plate
9.1.3 SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
9.1.4
Type
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X-300 FDA and IEC approvals
The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
CLASS 1 LED Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
227
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.1 X-300 product group
Type
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1FE
X320-3LD FE
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
-
-
CLASS 1 LED Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
Image 9-2 FDA and IEC approvals
9.1.5 Overview of the X-300 approvals
Table 9- 1 Overview of the approvals
Type
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1FE
X320-3LD FE c-UL-us
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
● c-UL-us for hazardous locations
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
FM
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
C-TICK
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
CE
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
ATEX95
Zone 2
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
E1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
Note
Shipbuilding approval
No applications for shipbuilding approvals will be made for the SCALANCE X-300.
228
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.1.6
Type
X304-2FE
X306-1LD FE
X307-3
X307-3LD
X308-2
X308-2LD
X308-2LH
X308-2LH+
X310
X310FE
X320-1FE
X320-3LD FE
X-300 mechanical stability (in operation)
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
IEC 60068-2-27 shock
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
9.2 Product group X-300M
9.2.1 X-300M approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
229
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
230
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this product.
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
231
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
232
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
Report no. E240480
Railway approval
The TS variant of the device meets the requirements of the Railway standard EN
50155:2007 "Railway Applications - Electronic equipment used on rolling stock".
9.2.2 X-300M type plate
9.2.3
Image 9-3 Specimen X-300M type plate
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
233
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.2 Product group X-300M
9.2.4 X-300M FDA and IEC approvals
The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:
Product line
X-300
X-300
Product group
X-300M
X-300M
Device:
SCALANCE
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
(Variant)
-
-
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
-
-
Note: In the modular devices (M), the marking is provided by the MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers.
Image 9-4 FDA and IEC approvals
9.2.5 Overview of X-300M approvals
Table 9- 2 Overview of the approvals
Device:
SCALANCE
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
(Variant)
(-)
(-) c-UL-us
●
● c-UL-us for hazardous locations
1
●
●
FM
1
●
●
C-TICK
●
●
CE
●
●
ATEX95
Zone 2
1
●
●
E1
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
-
-
Note
Shipbuilding approval
No applications for shipbuilding approvals will be made for the SCALANCE X-300M.
234
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.2.6
Device:
SCALANCE
X-300M mechanical stability (in operation)
(Variant)
X308-2M
X308-2M TS
(-)
(-)
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
●
●
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
IEC 60068-2-27 shock
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
●
●
9.3 Product group XR-300M
9.3.1 XR-300M approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Requirements
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
235
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
Field of application
Emission
Requirements
Immunity to interference
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
236
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this product.
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
237
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
238
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
Note
Only variants with 100 to 240 VAC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
239
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
Railway approval
The TS variant of the device meets the requirements of the Railway standard EN
50155:2007 "Railway Applications - Electronic equipment used on rolling stock".
Note
When used on railway stock, a stabilized power supply must be used to comply with
EN50155.
9.3.2 XR-300M type plate
9.3.3
Image 9-5 Specimen XR-300M type plate
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
240
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
9.3.4 XR-300M FDA and IEC approvals
The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:
Product line
X-300
Product group
Device:
SCALANC
E
XR-300M XR324-
12M
XR324-
12M
XR324-
12M
Variant
2 x 24 VDC
Data cable outlet on front
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Data cable outlet on front
2 x 24 VDC
Data cable outlet at rear
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
-
-
-
XR324-
12M
1 x 100 to 240 VAC
Data cable outlet at rear
-
Note: In the modular devices (M), the marking is provided by the MM900 media modules and the SFP transceivers.
Image 9-6 FDA and IEC approvals
9.3.5 Overview of XR-300M approvals
Note
The 24 V DC variants do not have an E1 approval.
The 100 to 240 V AC variants have C-Tick and CE approvals but are only UL508 listed. They do not have UL hazloc, FM or ATEX approvals.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
241
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.3 Product group XR-300M
Table 9- 3 Overview of the approvals
Device Variant c-UL-us
Inf. Tech.
Eq. c-UL-us for Hazardous Locations
1)
● c-UL-us
Ind. Cont.
Eq.
FM
1)
C-TICK CE
XR324-
12M
2 x 24 VDC,
Data cable outlet on front
1 x 100 to
240 VAC,
Data cable outlet on front
2 x 24 VDC
Data cable outlet at rear
●
-
●
-
●
-
●
-
●
-
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1 x 100 to
240 VAC, data cable outlet at rear
- - ● - ● ●
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
ATEX95
Zone 2
1)
●
-
●
-
9.3.6 XR-300M mechanical stability (in operation)
Device:
SCALANCE
(Variant)
XR324-12M ( 2 x DC data cable outlet on front)
XR324-12M (1 x 100...240 VAC, data cable outlet on front)
XR324-12M ( 2 x 24 VDC data cable outlet at rear)
XR324-12M (1 x 100 to 240 VAC, data cable outlet at rear)
*) Note: When rack mounted with 4 securing points
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration
10 – 58 Hz: 0.15 mm
58 – 500 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min,
10 cycles
●
●
●
●
IEC 60068-2-27 shock
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
●
●
●
●
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration *)
5 – 8.51 Hz: 7 mm
8.51 – 500 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min,
10 cycles
●
●
●
●
242
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.4 X-300EEC product group
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
9.4.1 X-300EEC approvals and certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
The term "the product" as used below includes all device variants of the
SCALANCE X-300EEC unless specific variants are expressly named for an approval.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
Low voltage equipment directive
Devices supplied with 100 to 240 VAC meet the requirements of the directive 2006/95/EC
"Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits” (Low Voltage
Equipment Directive). Conformity attested by compliance with the standard EN 60950-
1:2010.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
243
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
Field of application
Emission
Requirements
Immunity to interference
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
244
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
245
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
IEC 61850-3 (EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A)
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEC 61850-3
(EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A).
IEEE 1613
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEEE 1613 CLASS 1 (electrical ports) or
IEEE 1613 CLASS 2 (optical ports).
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
246
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
Note
Only variants with 100 to 240 VAC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
9.4.2 SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
247
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.4 X-300EEC product group
9.4.3 Overview of the approvals for the X-300EEC
Table 9- 4 Overview of the approvals
Device Variant c-UL-us
Inf. Tech.
Eq. c-UL-us for Hazardous Locations
1)
● c-UL-us
Ind. Cont.
Eq.
FM
1)
C-TICK CE
X302-
7EEC
X302-
2EEC
24 to 48
VDC
100...240
VAC /
60...250
VDC
●
- -
-
●
●
-
●
●
●
●
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
ATEX95
Zone 2
1)
●
-
9.4.4 X-300EEC mechanical stability (in operation)
All variants of the IE Switch SCALANCE X-300EEC meet the following requirements for mechanical stability:
● IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
For further details, refer to the technical specifications.
248
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
9.5.1 XR-300M EEC approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
Low voltage equipment directive
Devices supplied with 100 to 240 VAC meet the requirements of the directive 2006/95/EC
"Electrical Equipment Designed for Use within Certain Voltage Limits” (Low Voltage
Equipment Directive). Conformity attested by compliance with the standard EN 60950-
1:2010.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
249
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this product.
250
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
251
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
IEC 61850-3 (EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A)
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEC 61850-3
(EN55022 / CISPR22 CLASS A).
IEEE 1613
The product meets the requirements of the standard IEEE 1613 CLASS 1 (electrical ports) or
IEEE 1613 CLASS 2 (optical ports).
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
252
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
Note
Only variants with 100 to 240 VAC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
9.5.2 SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
253
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.5 XR-300M EEC product group
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
9.5.3 Overview of XR-300M EEC approvals
Note
The 24 to 48 V variants do not have an E1 approval.
The 100 to 240 V variants have C-Tick and CE approvals, are only UL508 listed, have no UL hazloc, FM or ATEX.
Table 9- 5 Overview of the approvals
Device Variant c-UL-us
Inf. Tech.
Eq.
● c-UL-us for Hazardous
Locations
1)
● c-UL-us
Ind. Cont.
Eq.
-
FM
1)
C-TICK CE
XR324-4M
EEC
1 x 24 to 48 VDC, data cable outlet on front
2 x 24 to 48 VDC, data cable outlet on front
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC, data cable outlet on front
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC, data cable outlet on front
1 x 24 to 48 VDC, data cable outlet at rear
2 x 24 to 48 VDC,
Data cable outlet at rear
1 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC, data cable outlet at rear
2 x 100 to 240 VAC / 60 to
250 VDC, data cable outlet at rear
●
-
-
●
●
-
-
●
-
-
●
●
-
-
-
●
●
-
-
●
●
●
●
-
-
●
●
-
-
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
ATEX95 Zone 2
1)
●
●
-
-
●
●
-
-
9.5.4
254
XR-300M EEC mechanical stability (in operation)
The devices of the SCALANCE XR-300M EEC product group meet the following standards
(prerequisite: rack mounted with 4 securing points):
● IEC 60068-2-6
(vibrations during transportation and operation)
Test parameters:
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● IEC 60068-2-27
(shocks during operation)
Test parameters:
15 g , 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
● IEC 60068-2-6
(vibrations during transportation)
Test parameters:
10 – 58 Hz: 0.075 mm
85 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
9.6.1 X-300M PoE approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
Approvals for shipbuilding are not printed on the device type plate.
Note
Shipbuilding approval
You will find shipbuilding approvals on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry
Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441 )
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
255
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
256
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
257
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
FM
The product meets the requirement of the standard:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
258
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.6.2
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.6 Product group X-300M PoE
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
9.6.3 Overview of X-300M PoE approvals
Table 9- 6 Overview of the approvals
Device
X308-2M PoE c-UL-us
Inf. Tech. Eq.
● c-UL-us for Hazardous
Locations
1)
●
FM
1)
●
C-TICK
●
CE
●
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
ATEX95 Zone 2
1)
●
Note
Shipbuilding approval
You will find shipbuilding approvals on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry
Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
Auto-Hotspot
"Entry list" tab > entry type "Certificates"
9.6.4 X-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation
The switch meets the following requirements for mechanical stability:
IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)
● Securing on a DIN rail
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
259
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)
● Securing on a DIN rail
15 g, 11 ms duration, 6 shocks per axis
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
9.7.1 XR-300M PoE approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety
260
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
261
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
Note
Only variants with 100 to 240 VAC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
262
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
Note
Only variants with 24 VDC power supply meet the requirements of this approval.
Railway approval
The TS variant of the device meets the requirements of the Railway standard EN
50155:2007 "Railway Applications - Electronic equipment used on rolling stock".
Note
When used on railway stock, a stabilized power supply must be used to comply with
EN50155.
9.7.2 SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address:
SCALANCE X-300 declaration of conformity
( https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/ps/15296/cert )
1. Click on the entry "SCALANCE X-300 managed" in the navigation panel at the top edge of the window and from the drop-down list that opens, select the entry for your product group.
2. Select the entry "Certificate" from the "Entry type"drop-down list.
Result: A list of the available certificates is displayed.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
263
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.7 Product group XR-300M PoE
9.7.3 Overview of XR-300M PoE approvals
Table 9- 7 Overview of the approvals
Device
XR324-4M
PoE
Variant
1 x 24 VDC
1 x 100 to
240 VAC c-UL-us
Inf. Tech.
Eq.
●
- c-UL-us for Hazardous Locations
1)
●
- c-UL-us
Ind. Cont.
Eq.
-
●
FM
1)
●
-
C-TICK
●
●
CE
●
●
XR324-4M
PoE TS
1 x 24 VDC ● ● - ● ● ●
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
ATEX95
Zone 2
1)
●
-
●
9.7.4 XR-300M PoE mechanical stability in operation
The switch meets the following requirements for mechanical stability:
IEC 60068-2-6 (vibration)
● Mounting in the rack: (2-point mounting:)
10 to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm
85 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
● Individual mounting: (4-point mounting):
5 to 8.51 Hz: 3.5 mm
8.51 – 500 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
IEC 60068-2-27 (shock)
● Mounting in the rack (2-point mounting):
15 g, 11 ms duration, 6 shocks per axis
264
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.8 MM900 product group
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
9.8.1 MM900 approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
265
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
266
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
9.8.1.1 ATEX (KEMA 07 ATEX0145 X)
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
ATEX classification
II 3 (2) G Ex nA [op is Gb] IIC T4 Gc
DEKRA 11 ATEX 0060 X
These products meet the requirements of the standards
● EN 60079-15: 2010
● EN 60079-0:2009
● EN 60079-28: 2007
Note
Only the media modules MM991-2 meet the requirements of this approval.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
267
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
IECEx (optical radiation)
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA [op is Gb] IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0026X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
● IEC 60079-28 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 28: Protection of equipment and transmission systems using with optical radiation)
You will find the current versions of the standards in the currently valid IECEx certificates.
Note
Only the media modules MM991-2 meet the requirements of this approval.
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
268
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
cULus approval for industrial control equipment
cULus Listed IND. CONT. EQ.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 508
● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987
Report no. E85972
cULus Approval Hazardous Location
cULus Listed I. T. E. FOR HAZ. LOC.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● ANSI/ISA 12.12.01-2007
● CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
Approved for use in
Cl. 1, Div. 2, GP A, B, C, D T4
Cl. 1, Zone 2, GP IIC T4
Report no. E240480
Railway approval
The following media modules meets the requirements of the Railway standard EN
50155:2007 "Railway Applications - Electronic equipment used on rolling stock".
● MM992-2 (C)
● MM992-2CUC (C)
● MM992-2 M12 (C)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
269
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
Media modules with the supplement (C) in the type name have varnished printed circuit boards (conformal coating).
Note
When used on railway stock, a stabilized power supply must be used to comply with
EN50155.
9.8.2 MM900 declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity
You will find the EU declaration of conformity for these products on the Internet under the following entry ID: 67218486 http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67218486
9.8.3 Overview of the MM900 approvals
Note
The MM900 media modules only have UL60950, C-Tick, CE, FM and ATEX approvals.
The other approvals are device approvals and are obtained for the device with the various components.
Table 9- 8 Overview of the approvals
Device:
SCALANCE
(Variant) c-UL-us
MM992-2CUC ● c-UL-us for hazardous locations
1
●
MM992-2CU
MM992-2CU (C)
(2 x 10/100/1000
Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar)
(2 x 10/100/1000
Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical without securing collar)
(2 x 10/100/1000
Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical without securing collar, varnished)
●
●
●
●
FM
1
●
●
●
C-TICK CE
●
●
●
●
●
●
ATEX95
Zone 2
1
●
●
●
E1
-
-
-
270
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Device:
SCALANCE
(Variant)
MM992-2M12 (C) (2 x 10/100/1000
Mbps, GE M12 connector electrical, varnished)
MM992-2VD (2 x 10/100/1000
Mbps, RJ-45 ports electrical with securing collar)
MM992-2SFP
MM991-2
(2x 100/1000 Mbps,
SFP media module)
(2 x 100 Mbps,
BFOC ports optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
(2 x 100 Mbps,
BFOC port optical
(multimode, glass) with diagnostics up to max. 5 km)
(2 x 100 Mbps,
BFOC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26km)
MM991-2 (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
MM991-2LD (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26km)
MM991-2LH+ (SC) (2 x 100 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
MM991-2P (2 x 100 Mbps SC
RJ ports optical for
Plastic Optical Fiber
(POF) up to max.
50 m or Polymer
Cladded Fiber
(PCF) up to max.
100 m)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, for glass FO cable
(multimode), up to max. 750 m, varnished) c-UL-us
● c-UL-us for hazardous locations
1
●
FM
1
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
E1 C-TICK CE
● ●
ATEX95
Zone 2
1
● -
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
271
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.8 MM900 product group
Device:
SCALANCE
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
(Variant) c-UL-us c-UL-us for hazardous locations
1
●
FM
1
C-TICK CE ATEX95
Zone 2
1
E1
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(2 x 1000 Mbps, SC ports optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
-
-
-
-
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the type plate.
Note
Shipbuilding approval
The shipbuilding approval applies to all MM900 media modules.
9.8.4 MM900 FDA and IEC approvals
Media module
MM992-2CUC
MM992-2CUC (C)
MM992-2CU
MM992-2M12 (C)
MM992-2VD
MM992-2SFP
*)
MM991-2
MM991-2FM
MM991-2LD
MM991-2 (SC)
MM991-2LD (SC)
MM991-2LH+ (SC)
MM992-2
MM992-2 (C)
The following MM900 media modules meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:
-
-
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
-
-
-
-
CLASS 1 LED Product
CLASS 1 LED Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LED Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
272
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
Media module
MM992-2LD
MM992-2LH
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
MM992-2LH+
MM992-2ELH
CLASS 1 LASER Product
CLASS 1 LASER Product
*)
You will find further information in the compact operating instructions "Transceiver SFP/SFP+".
Image 9-7 FDA and IEC approvals
9.9 Product group SFP
9.9.1 Approvals, certificates
Approvals issued
Note
Issued approvals on the type plate of the device
The specified approvals apply only when the corresponding mark is printed on the product.
You can check which of the following approvals have been granted for your product by the markings on the type plate.
EC directives
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements and aims of the following EC directives.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
273
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
EMC directive (electromagnetic compatibility)
The SIMATIC NET products described in these operating instructions meet the requirements of EC directive 2004/108/EC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" for the following areas of application:
Field of application Requirements
Industry
Emission
EN 61000-6-4 : 2007
Immunity to interference
EN 61000-6-2 : 2005
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur
The installation of expansions that are not approved for SIMATIC NET products or their target systems may violate the requirements and regulations for safety and electromagnetic compatibility.
Only use expansions that are approved for the system.
● Keep to the installation guidelines
The devices meet the requirements if you adhere to the installation and safety instructions contained in this documentation and in the following documentation when installing and operating the devices.
● You can always find the latest documentation on the Internet
The current descriptions of the currently available products can always be found on the
Internet under the specified entry IDs/Internet pages:
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET Industrial Ethernet" System Manual
– "Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET - Passive network components" System Manual
You will find information on the system manuals in the section "ID = 27069465
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465 )", in "Further documentation".
– "EMC Installation Guidelines" configuration manual
ID = 60612658 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/60612658 )
● Working on the device
To protect the device from electrostatic discharge, personnel must first discharge any electrostatic charge from their body before touching the device.
Note
The test was performed with a device and a connected communications partner that also meets the requirements of the standards listed above.
When operating the device with a communications partner that does not comply with these standards, adherence to the corresponding values cannot be guaranteed.
274
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
Machinery directive
The product is a component in compliance with the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42//EEC.
According to the machinery directive, we are obliged to point out that the product described is intended solely for installation in a machine.
Before the final product can be put into operation, it must be tested to ensure that it conforms with the directive 2006/42/EEC.
Note
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EEC for this product.
Note for the manufacturers of machines
This product is not a machine in the sense of the EC Machinery Directive. There is therefore no declaration of conformity relating to the EC Machinery Directive 89/392/EEC for this product.
ATEX (explosion protection directive)
WARNING
When using SIMATIC NET products in hazardous area zone 2, make absolutely sure that the associated conditions in the following document are adhered to:
"SIMATIC NET Product Information Use of subasseblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous
Area".
You will find this document
• on the data medium that ships with some devices.
• on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online Support
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en ).
Enter the document identification number C234 as the search term.
SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of the EC directive:94/9/EC "Equipment and
Protective Devices for Use in Potentially Explosive Atmospheres".
ATEX classification:
II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
KEMA 07ATEX0145 X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● EN 60079-15: 2010 (electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of protection "n")
● EN 60079-0: 2009 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
275
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
IECEx
The SIMATIC NET products meet the requirements of explosion protection according to
IECEx.
IECEx classification:
Ex nA IIC T4 Gc
DEK 14.0025X
The products meet the requirements of the following standards:
● IEC 60079-15 : 2010 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 15: Equipment protection by type of protection "n"
● IEC 60079-0 : 2011 (Explosive atmospheres - Part 0: Equipment - General requirements)
FM
The product meets the requirements of the standards:
● Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611
● FM Hazardous (Classified) Location Electrical Equipment:
Non Incendive / Class I / Division 2 / Groups A,B,C,D / T4 and
Non Incendive / Class I / Zone 2 / Group IIC / T4
C-Tick
The product meets the requirements of the AS/NZS 2064 standard (Class A).
Note
The SFP transceivers do not have UL listing but a c-UR-us approval (component approval).
cULus Approval for Information Technology Equipment
cULus Listed I. T. E.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. complying with
● UL 60950-1 (Information Technology Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1-03
Report no. E115352
276
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
9.9.2 SFP type plate
Image 9-8 SFP specimen type plate top
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
9.9.3
Image 9-9 SFP specimen type plate bottom
SFP declaration of conformity
Declaration of conformity
You will find the EC Declaration of Conformity for these products on the Internet at the following address: http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67218486
( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67218486 )
--> Entry list
--> Entry type "Certificates"
--> Certificate type "Declaration of Conformity"
Example German: "EG-Konformitätserklärung SCALANCE X310",
Example English: "Declaration of Conformity SCALANCE X310".
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
277
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
9.9.4
Product line
X-300
SFP FDA and IEC approvals
The following devices meet the FDA and IEC requirements listed below:
Product group
SFP
Device:
Transceiver
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
(Variant)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max.
26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max.
70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
Fulfills FDA and IEC requirements
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Image 9-10 FDA and IEC approvals
9.9.5 Overview of the SFP approvals
Note
The SFP transceivers only have UL60950, C-Tick, CE, FM and ATEX approvals.
The other approvals are device approvals and are obtained for the device with the various components.
278
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
Table 9- 9 Overview of the approvals
Device:
Pluggable transceiver
SFP991-1
(Variant) c-UL-us
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+
SFP992-1
SFP992-1LD
SFP992-1LH
SFP992-LH+
SFP992-1ELH
FM
1
C-TICK CE ATEX95
Zone 2
1
E1
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
For temperature information "T.." or the maximum ambient temperature "Ta:..", refer to the table of environmental conditions.
Note
Shipbuilding approval
The shipbuilding approval applies to all SFP transceivers.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
279
Approvals, certificates, standards
9.9 Product group SFP
9.9.6
Device: transceiver
SFP mechanical stability (in operation)
(Variant)
SFP991-1
SFP991-1LD
SFP991-1LH+ (1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1 (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 750m)
SFP992-1LD
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, multimode glass, up to max. 3 km)
(1 x 100 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 26 km)
SFP992-1LH
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 10km)
(1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 40km)
SFP992-LH+ (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 70km)
SFP992-1ELH (1 x 1000 Mbps, LC port optical, single mode glass, up to max. 120km)
IEC 60068-2-6 vibration
5 – 9 Hz: 3.5 mm
9 – 150 Hz: 1 g
1 octave/min, 20 sweeps
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
IEC 60068-2-27 shock
15 g, 11 ms duration
6 shocks per axis
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
280
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Accessories
10.1 Accessories
Table 10- 1 Accessories and order numbers
Product
"Industrial Ethernet TP and Fiber Optic Networks" manual
Cables and accessories
IE FC Stripping Tool
IE FC blade cassettes
IE FC TP standard cable GP
IE FC TP trailing cable
IE FC TP marine cable
IE FC TP trailing cable GP
IE FC TP flexible cable GP
IE FC FRNC cable GP
IE FC ground cable
IE FC TP festoon cable GP
IE FC ground cable
IE TP train cable, 2 x 2, CAT5
IE FC TP food cable
IE TP torsion cable
IE FC Standard Cable, 4 x 2, AWG24
Order number
6GK1970-1BA10-0AA0
6GK1901-1GA00
6GK1901-1GB00
6XV1840-2AH10
6XV1840-3AH10
6XV1840-4AH10
6XV1870-2D
6XV1870-2B
6XV1871-2F
6XV1871-2G
6XV1871-2S
6XV1871-2G
6XV1871-2T
6XV1871-2L
6XV1870-2F
6XV1878-2A
IE FC Flexible Cable, 4 x 2, AWG24
IE TP train cable, 4 x 2, CAT7
PROFIBUS FC standard cable GP
Fast Ethernet connector
6XV1878-2B
6XV1878-2T
6XV1830-0EH10
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 1
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 10
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 pack of 50
Gigabit connector
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 4 x 2, pack of 1
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 4 x 2, pack of 10
IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180 4 x 2, pack of 50
FO connectors and accessories
FC FO Standard Cable GP (62.5/200/230)
FC FO Trailing Cable (62.5/200/230)
6GK1901-1BB10-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB10-2AE0
6GK1901-1BB11-2AA0
6GK1901-1BB11-2AB0
6GK1901-1BB11-2AE0
6XV1847-2A
6XV1847-2C
Crimp and Cleave assembly case for FC FO system 6GK1900-1GL00-0AB0
FC BFOC connector set with cleaning cloths and dust protection cap, pack of 20
6GK1900-1GB00-0AC0
FC SC connector set with cleaning cloths and dust protection cap, pack of 20 = 10 duplex connectors
6GK1900-1LB00-0AC0
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Available for SCALANCE ...
All switches
For IE cables
For stripping tool
(gigabit cable)
(gigabit cable)
For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
For all electrical Fast Ethernet ports
For all electrical gigabit ports
For all electrical gigabit ports
For all electrical gigabit ports
10
281
Accessories
10.1 Accessories
Product
FC BFOC coupler, 10 single couplings
FC SC coupler, 5 duplex couplings
C-PLUG
C-PLUG
Order number
6GK1900-1GP00-0AB0
6GK1900-1LP00-0AB0
6GK1900-0AB00
Available for SCALANCE ...
SCALANCE X-200 / X-300 / X-400
282
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.1
Small design
Dimension drawing
Note
The IE Switches X-300 are available in small, medium and large variants.
The dimension drawings are shown below.
11
Image 11-1 Small design dimension drawing (example used here SCALANCE X306-1LD FE)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
283
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing
Image 11-2 Small design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-306)
284
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Medium design
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing
Image 11-3 Medium design dimension drawing (example used here SCALANCE X308-2)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
285
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing
286
Image 11-4 Medium design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-300)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Large design
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing
Image 11-5 Large design dimension drawing Part 1 (example used here SCALANCE X320-3LD FE)
Image 11-6 Large design dimension drawing Part 2 (example used here SCALANCE X320-3LD FE)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
287
Graphics
11.1 Dimension drawing
Image 11-7 Large design dimension drawing (IE Switch X-320)
288
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.2 X-300M dimension drawings
11.2 X-300M dimension drawings
Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the X-300M product group.
Image 11-8 X308-2M dimension drawing
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
289
Graphics
11.2 X-300M dimension drawings
Image 11-9 X308-2M drilling template
290
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings
Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the XR-300M product group.
Image 11-10 Front view of the XR324-12M
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
291
Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings
Image 11-11 XR324-12M from above
292
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.3 XR-300M dimension drawings
Image 11-12 XR324-12M from above
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
293
Graphics
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings
All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters
294
Image 11-13 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - view
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.4 X-300EEC dimension drawings
Image 11-14 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - side view
Image 11-15 Dimension drawing IE Switch X302-7EEC - from above
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
295
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
Image 11-16 Housing front and rear
Image 11-17 Top of the housing
296
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
Mounting the IE Switch X-300EEC
CAUTION
Making a mounting support
Suitable mounting supports are necessary for wall mounting and 19" rack mounting. Have these made according to the drawing.
You will find other accessories, such as screws in the tables. If you have questions, contact our Customer Support.
You will also find dimension drawings on the Internet on the pages of Siemens Industry
Automation Customer Support under the following entry ID:
33118441 ( http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/33118441 )
→ "Entry list" tab
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
297
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
Mounting support for EEC wall mounting
298
Image 11-18 X-300EEC wall mounting (dimensions in mm)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Mounting support for 19" rack mounting of the X-300EEC switch
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
Image 11-19 Rack mounting of two X-300EECs fastened together (view from below)
Table 11- 1 Legend for rack mounting of two X-300EECs fastened together
No.
1
2
3
4
Number needed
2
12
12
1
Name
Plate for side
Spring washer SN60727-4-NrSt
Hexagonal nut ISO 4032-M4-8
Mid part of mounting support
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
299
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
300
Image 11-20 Side part of mounting support for X-300EEC (dimensions in mm)
Material: Plate 2.0 DIN EN10152 DC01+ZE25/25
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.5 XR-300M EEC dimension drawings
See also
Image 11-21 Middle part of mounting support for X-300EEC (dimensions in mm)
Material: Plate 2.0 DIN EN10152 DC01+ZE25/25
19" rack mounting - X-300EEC product group (Page 115)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
301
Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings
Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the MM900 product group.
Image 11-22 MM900 dimension drawing 1: Electrical RJ-45 ports with securing collar
302
Image 11-23 MM900 dimension drawing 2: Electrical RJ-45 ports without securing collar
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings
Image 11-24 MM900 dimension drawing 3: BFOC ports
Image 11-25 MM900 dimension drawing 4: Optical SC ports
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
303
Graphics
11.6 MM900 dimension drawings
Image 11-26 MM900 dimension drawing 5: SFP media module
Image 11-27 MM900 dimension drawing 6: M12 ports electrical
304
Image 11-28 MM900 dimension drawing 7: SC RJ ports optical
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
11.7
Graphics
11.7 SFP dimension drawings
SFP dimension drawings
Note
The following dimension drawings are available for the SFP product group.
Note
All dimensions are ± 0.2 mm unless otherwise specified.
Image 11-29 SFP dimension drawing
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
305
Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings
All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters.
306
Image 11-30 X308-2M PoE: Front view
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings
Image 11-31 X308-2M PoE: Side view
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
307
Graphics
11.8 X-300M PoE dimension drawings
308
Image 11-32 X308-2M PoE: Drilling template
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings
All dimensions in the drawings are in millimeters.
Graphics
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings
Image 11-33 XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS: Front view
Image 11-34 XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS: Side view
Image 11-35 XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS: Rear
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
309
Graphics
11.9 XR-300M PoE dimension drawings
Image 11-36 XR324-4M PoE and XR324-4M PoE TS: From above
310
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Appendix
A.1 TP port
Connector pinout
On the IE Switch X-300, the TP ports are implemented as RJ-45 jacks with MDI-X assignment (Medium Dependent Interface–Autocrossover) of a network component.
A
Image A-1 RJ-45 jack
Table A- 1 Pin assignment
Pin 8
Pin 7
Pin 6
Pin 5
Pin 4
Pin 3
Pin 2
Pin 1
Pin number Pinning of the Fast Ethernet ports
of IE-Switches X-300 (P1-P7)
Except:
SCALANCE X310FE (P1-P10) n. c. n. c.
TD- n. c. n. c.
TD+
RD-
RD+
3-
3+
1-
2-
2+
1+
0-
0+
Pinning of the gigabit Ethernet ports on SCALANCE X310 (P8 - P10) on SCALANCE X308-2, X308-2LD, X308-2LH,
X308-2LH+ (P8)
Note
TP cords or TP-XP cords with a maximum length of 10 m can be connected to the RJ-45 TP port.
With the IE FC cables and IE FC RJ-45 plug, an overall cable length of up to 100 m is permitted between two devices depending on the cable type.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
311
Appendix
A.1 TP port
Autonegotiation
Autonegotiation means the automatic detection of the functionality of the port at the opposite end. Using autonegotiation, network components or end devices can detect the functionality available at the port of a partner device allowing automatic configuration of different types of device. With autonegotiation, two components connected to a link segment can exchange parameters and set themselves to match the supported communication functionality.
Note
With devices that do not support autonegotiation, the IE Switch X-300 port must be set manually to the speed and duplexity settings of the device (in other words, the identical setting).
Note
The IE Switch X-300 is a plug-and-play device that does not require settings to be made for commissioning.
MDI /MDIX autocrossover function
The advantage of the MDI /MDIX autocrossover function is that straight-through cables can be used throughout and crossover Ethernet cables are unnecessary. This prevents malfunctions resulting from mismatching send and receive wires. This makes installation much easier for the user.
The IE Switches X-300 all support the MDI / MDIX autocrossover function.
Note
Autocrossover works only in autonegotiation is enabled. If the setting is fixed, there is no autocrossover (see Glossary).
Note
Please note that a direct connection between two ports on the IE Switch X-300 or an accidental connection over several IE Switches X-300 can cause illegal formation of loops unless RSTP or STP is activated. Such a loop can lead to network overload and network failures.
312
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Appendix
A.2 The connector system M12/X coded according to IEC 61076-2-109
A.2
Description
The connector system M12/X coded according to IEC 61076-2-109
M12 connectors with X coding are also suitable for transmission rates up to 210 Gbps
(Cat6A) because the shields of the wire pairs can be led into the connectors. A further advantage is the availability of connectors with degree of protection IP67 with which the equipped devices are also suitable for adverse environmental conditions (dust, dampness).
Due to the locking technology standardized for the M12 connectors a high resistance to vibration is achieved. Numerous SCALANCE devices therefore provide connection options for X coded M12 connectors.
Pin assignment
A Front view of M12 connector, X coded according to IEC61076-2-109
B Front view of RJ-45 connector, latching nose at the top, with pin assignment according to EIA/TIA 568B
Pin
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
M12/X coded
Wire color
White / orange
Orange
White / green
Green
White / brown
Brown
White / blue
Blue
Signal
TX+
TX-
RX+
RX-
RJ-45 according to EIA/TIA 568B
Wire color
White / orange
Orange
White / green
Blue
White / blue
Green
White / brown
Brown
Signal
TX+
TX-
RX+
RX-
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
313
Appendix
A.3 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
A.3 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Assembly of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug on an IE FC Standard Cable
For information on assembling an IE FC RJ-45 Plug on a SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
FastConnect cable, please refer to the instructions supplied with the IE FC RJ-45 Plug.
Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
1. Insert the IE FC RJ-45 Plug in the twisted-pair interface of the IE switch until it locks in place.
Image A-2 Inserting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180)
The flush fit and locking mechanism of the PROFINET-compliant IE FC RJ-45 Plug along with the securing collar on the TP port of the IE Switch guarantee a robust connection suitable for industrial conditions providing tensile and bending strain relief for the inserted connector.
The RJ-45 interface of the IE Switch X-300EEC is fitted with a securing bracket instead of a securing collar. To increase mechanical stability, you can secure the IE FC RJ-45 PLUG to this securing bracket with a cable binder.
Removing the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
1. Press on the locking lever of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug gently to remove the plug.
314
Image A-3 Releasing the RJ-45 plug (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180)
If there is not enough space to release the lock with your hand, you can also use a 2.5 mm screwdriver. You can then remove the IE FC RJ-45 Plug from the twisted pair socket.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Appendix
A.3 Fitting the IE FC RJ-45 Plug
Image A-4 Releasing the RJ-45 plug with a screwdriver (based on the example of the IE FC RJ-45
Plug 180)
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
315
Appendix
A.4 Electrical tests (EEC devices)
A.4 Electrical tests (EEC devices)
Regulations / standards
● IEC 60255 (product standards)
● IEEE C37.90.0/.1/.2
● UL 508
Further standards: See individual tests.
Insulation test
Relevant standards: IEC 60255-5 and IEC 60870-2-1
Voltage test (routine test) for all circuits except communications and time synchronization interfaces 2.5 kV (eff) 50 Hz / 3.5 kV DC
Voltage test (routine test) only for protected communications interfaces 500 V (eff) 50 Hz /
707 V DC
Voltage test (routine test) for all circuits except communications interfaces, class III 5 kV
(peak); 1.2/50 μs; 0.5 J
EMC tests of immunity (type tests)
Relevant standards: IEC 60255-6 and -22 (product standards), EN 61000-6-2 (generic standard)
High frequency test IEC 60255-22-1, class III / IEEE C37.90.1, 2.5 kV (peak); 1 MHz
Discharge of static electricity IEC 60255-22-2, class IV and IEC 61000-4-2, class IV 8 kV contact discharge; 15 kV air discharge
Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance, frequency sweep IEC 60255-22-3, class III
IEC 61000-4-3, class III 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz 10 V/m; 800 MHz to
960 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz 20 V/m; 1.4 GHz to 2.0 GHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Irradiation with RF field, single frequencies IEC 60255-22-3, IEC 61000-4-3, class III – amplitude modulated – pulse modulated 10 V/m 80/160/450/900 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Fast transients / burst IEC 60255-22-4 and IEC 61000-4-4 and IEEE C37.90.1 class IV 4 kV
High voltage spikes (SURGE), IEC 61000-4-5 installation class 4, auxiliary voltage pulse:
1.2/50 μs common mode: 4 kV; diff. mode: 2 kV
Relay outputs, common mode: 4 kV; diff. mode: 2 kV (valid for the signaling contact
100..240 V AC/60...250 V DC)
Line conducted high frequency, amplitude modulated IEC 61000-4-6, class III 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 60255-6 IEC 61000-4-8, class IV 0.5 mT; 50 Hz, 30 A/m permanent; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
316
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Appendix
A.5 EMC-compatible installation of electrical Industrial Ethernet or PROFIBUS cabling
Radiated electromagnetic interference IEEE Std C37.90.2 35 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz
Damped oscillatory magnetic field IEC 60694, IEC 61000-4-12 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating 100 kHz, 1 MHz
EMC tests of emission (type tests)
Relevant standard: EN 61000-6-1 (generic standard)
Radiated emission on cables, only auxiliary voltage IEC-CISPR 22 150 kHz to 30 MHz limit value class A
Radiated electric field strength IEC-CISPR 22, 30 MHz to 1000 MHz limit value class A
Voltage fluctuations and flicker on the power supply cable at 230 VAC IEC 61000-3-3; limit values kept to.
A.5 EMC-compatible installation of electrical Industrial Ethernet or
PROFIBUS cabling
The Industrial Ethernet / PROFINET system manual "Passive network components" prescribes the use of fiber-optic cables for cabling between buildings and/or external facilities because there may be large potential differences between nodes.
If IE FC or PROFIBUS FC cables are used for such applications, the same rules apply as when installing cables indoors.
The following also applies:
● Install cables on metal cable racks
● Electrically connect the cable racks where they join
● Ground the cable racks
● Connect the shields of the cables to the grounding network as close as possible to the point of entry into the building or facility.
● Electrical bus cables installed outside buildings must be included in the lightening protection and grounding concept of the entire system. Follow the instructions in
Appendix B "Lightning and Surge Voltage Protection for LAN Cables Between Buildings" of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks manual.
● All SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS cables can be used if they are installed in cable channels protected against dampness. The safety clearances specified in Appendix C.7 "Cable categories and clearances" of the SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Network Manual must then be adhered to.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
317
Appendix
A.6 Equipotential bonding
A.6 Equipotential bonding
When do potential differences occur?
Potential differences can, for example, be caused by different power supplies. Potential differences between separate parts of the plant can be damaging to the system in the following situations:
● Programmable controllers and peripheral devices are linked on grounded connections
● Cable shields are contacted at both ends and grounded to different parts of the plant.
How do you avoid potential differences?
Potential differences must be reduced by installing bonding conductors so that the functions of the electronic components used are guaranteed.
When and why is equipotential bonding necessary?
Several good reasons for equipotential bonding are listed below:
● Devices with a grounded interface can be damaged by potential differences.
● The shield of the PROFIBUS cable must not be used for equipotential bonding. This is, however, the case if parts of the system connected by the cable shield are connected to different grounding points.
● Equipotential bonding is a requirement for lightning protection.
Rule for equipotential bonding
Remember the following points about equipotential bonding systems:
● The lower the impedance of the equipotential bonding cable, the greater the effectiveness of the equipotential bonding.
● The impedance of the additional bonding conductor must not exceed 10% of the shield impedance of the bus cable.
● Make largearea contact between the bonding conductor and the PE conductor.
● Protect the bonding conductor from corrosion.
● Install the bonding conductor so that the area enclosed by the bonding conductor and signal cables is as small as possible.
● Use copper or galvanized steel for the bonding conductor
● Include metal, conductive cable channels/racks in the equipotential bonding of the building and between the individual parts of the system. The individual segments of the channels/racks must be connected together with low inductance and low resistance and connected to the building ground system as often as possible. Expansion joints and angled connections should be bridged by additional flexible grounding bands.
318
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Appendix
A.6 Equipotential bonding
● The connections between the individual segments of channels must be protected from corrosion (longterm stability)
● If there are connections between sections of buildings (for example separated by expansion joints) with their own reference point for the building ground network, a bonding conductor (equivalent copper crosssectional area ≥10 mm channels/racks are used.
2
) must be installed parallel to the cables. This bonding conductor is not necessary if metal, conducting cable
Note
Bonding conductors are unnecessary if the sections of a system are connected exclusively using fiberoptic cable (FO).
Notes on systems in which no equipotential bonding is possible
To ensure greater immunity to interference, cables for SIMATIC NET PROFINET and
PROFIBUS are always shielded. Due to the defined shielding property, the shield needs to make contact at both ends.
In systems in which no equipotential bonding is possible, the current flow via the shield needs to be prevented. Despite this, to be able to use the shield properties of the cable note the following:
● Contact the shield at one end with low resistance.
● Connect the other end of the shield to the grounding system using capacitive coupling.
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
319
Appendix
A.6 Equipotential bonding
320
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
Index
A
B
BA - Operating Instructions, 4
BAK - Operating Instructions (compact), 4
C
Connector pinout
D
E
G
H
M
MDI /MDIX autocrossover function, 312
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
N
Redundant coupling of two network segments, 44
Ring with redundancy manager, 41
P
Possible attachments
Power supply
R
Redundancy
S
Signaling contact
321
Index
System
manual, 224, 230, 236, 244, 250, 256, 261, 266, 274
T
322
SCALANCE X-300
Operating Instructions, 05/2016, A5E01113043-20
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement